JP2021159383A - Game board, game managing device, and game system - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game board, a game managing device, and a game system that do not use any tokens.SOLUTION: A game board includes game value number control means capable of executing processing for transmitting a game value number to an external processor and game value update processing for subtracting the game value number on the basis of operation to operation means, the game value number control means is means capable of transmitting a first value to the external processor as a game value number when a predetermined operation state is canceled before predetermined time passes after the operation means becomes a predetermined operation state, and capable of setting a counting promotion state when predetermined time passes while the operation means is in a predetermined operation state, the counting promotion state is a state that is maintained when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state, and is canceled when a predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, a second value larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted as a game value number to the external processor at a predetermined cycle in the counting promotion state, and the second value may increase according to length of continuation time of a predetermined operation state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 56

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

Conventionally, some game consoles require an actual medal to play a game (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-176415

In the conventional game table, by using medals, in addition to the medal counting work by the clerk, there is a problem of fraud such as bringing in medals from other stores.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table, a game management device, and a game system that do not use medals.

In order to solve the above problems, the game console of the present invention
Operation means and
A game value number storage means for storing the game value number related to the game value used for the game,
A game value number control means that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and a game value number control means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means executes the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. It ’s a possible means,
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number can be transmitted to the external processing device.
It is a means capable of setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state.
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle.
The second value may increase depending on the length of duration of the predetermined operating state.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table, a game management device, and a game system that do not use medals.

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the rental machine 700 as seen from the front side (player side). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a block diagram of the game system including the slot machine 100 and the rental machine 700 shown in FIG. It is a table summarizing the gaming machine status information, the gaming machine performance information, and the gaming machine installation information. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence when the game control state command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. It is a figure which shows the detail about the communication performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. (A) is a diagram showing details of hall control / fraud monitoring information, and (b) is a list of error codes. It is a table which shows the game control state command. It is a table which shows the medal number control state command. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence when the game control priority command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. (A) is a diagram showing the details of the game control priority command, and (b) is a diagram showing the details of the response command returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game control part main processing. It is a flowchart of the medal insertion / start lever reception process (step S102) in FIG. It is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. It is a flowchart of the settlement button processing (step S1102) in FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the variation information transmission process (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) addressed to the medal number control unit in FIGS. 15, 16 and 20. It is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, step S1409) addressed to the medal number control unit in FIGS. 14 and 18. It is a flowchart of the medal giving process (step S109) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the game control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of disconnection determination processing which is one of the error monitoring processing (step S203) in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the medal number control part main processing. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 25. It is a table which shows the target range of RAM clear processing. It is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 26 and the like. It is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG. 25. It is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 25. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the loan notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 25. It is a flowchart of the loan receipt result response transmission processing (step S308) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the medal number control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the loan notification reception processing (step S404) in FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 36. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the planned counting number update process (step S405) in FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 39. It is a flowchart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart of the start lever reception command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 42. 45 is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in FIGS. 45 and 47. It is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 47. It is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 42. It is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) addressed to the game control unit in FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of the display display processing (step S409) in FIG. 35. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the process during medal insertion of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the input command reception process of FIG. 43. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 38. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a modification of the scheduled counting number update process of FIG. 38. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. It is the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400, and (d) is the flowchart of the command processing (step S307) in (a). (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. It is the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500, and (d) is the flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a figure which shows the 1st example in which the counting button 171 was operated. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st example of the effect at the time of counting. It is a timing chart which shows the example which performed the bet operation before operating the count button 171 and the bet number was not 0. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a counting end effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example when the settlement button 134 is operated. It is a figure which shows the example which the number of sheets to be counted may increase as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes long. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 65 (c), and (b) is a state in which 30 sheets are set as the planned counting number in the example shown in FIG. 65 (c). It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the power is cut off and then the power is restored. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing an example in which the planned counting number update process of FIG. 57 is adopted. (A) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of "the number of game medals" stored in RAM 358 reaches a certain value, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example in which power failure occurs during automatic counting. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the power is restored. It is a figure which shows the display example which shows that the automatic counting is in progress. It is a figure which shows the sound output example which shows that the automatic counting is in progress. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the case where the electric power failure occurs before the elapse of 0.5 seconds which is the determination time of the long press operation after the operation of the count button 171 is started. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 71. It is a timing chart which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. 71. (A) is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) in the game medal number display device 170, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) in the game medal number display device 170. It is a figure which shows the example of another change display in the game medal number display device 170. In addition to the game medal number display device 170, the effect image display device 157 also shows an example of displaying the “game medal number” stored in the RAM 358. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 76. It is a figure which shows another example which is completely different from the example shown in FIG. 76. (A) is a timing chart when the payout is attempted to exceed the payout threshold value, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of the upper limit exceeding error notification. (A) is a timing chart when the payout is about to be performed beyond the second threshold value for payout, and (b) is a diagram showing another example of the upper limit imminent notification. It is a figure which shows the example of the case where the error notification with high urgency overlaps with the notification prompting the counting. (A) is a diagram showing an example in which notification for prompting counting continues even after shifting to the demonstration display, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of notification after the counting button 171 is operated during the demonstration. .. (A) is a diagram showing an example of notification when the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold value or a payout second threshold value and then falls below the specified number, and (b) is a diagram. , It is a figure which shows the example of the notification which prompts the count when "the number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold value for payout over a plurality of games. (A) is a diagram showing an example in which a notification for prompting counting is performed each time the "number of game medals" increases by a predetermined number, and (b) is a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player. It is a figure which shows the example, and (c) is the figure which shows the example of the case where the count button 171 is operated in a state which is disadvantageous to a player. (A) is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 84 (b), and (b) is a diagram showing an example in which the counting once forcibly terminated is restarted, and (c) is shown. Is an example of the modified example described with reference to (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). It is a timing chart which shows the example of the case where the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification which the operation differs depending on whether or not "the number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value. It is a timing chart which shows another example when the VL signal from a lending machine 700 is turned off.

Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the embodiment of the game console of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the embodiment of the game console of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a so-called medalless configuration is adopted in which information corresponding to the number of actual medals (number of virtual medals) is used without using actual medals. The description "number" will be used.

The slot machine described below starts rotation when a predetermined number of game medals are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, it is determined by lottery whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is won, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the process of paying out the number of game medals is executed and the game ends and matches. If not, it is a game table that advances a series of games that ends without executing the process of paying out the number of game medals.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the basic configuration of the rental machine 700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the rental machine 700 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which multiple types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. The design displayed on the upper part of the left reel 110 is the upper part of the left reel, the design displayed on the middle part of the left reel 110 is the middle part of the left reel, and the design displayed on the lower part of the left reel 110 is the lower part of the left reel and the middle reel. The symbol displayed on the upper row of 111 is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 111 is the middle symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 111 is the lower symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol on the right reel 112. The symbol displayed on the upper row is called the upper symbol on the right reel, the symbol displayed on the middle of the right reel 112 is called the middle symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower row of the right reel 112 is called the lower symbol on the right reel. Each of the symbols to 112 is displayed on each of the reels 110 to 112 in the vertical direction through the display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined based on the detection result of the optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line. The winning line is a line for determining whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. 3 If the book becomes valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines is not limited to 5, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the lower right The five winning lines, the winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

For example, the notification lamp 123 indicates that a specific winning combination (for example, a bonus combination or a special combination) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the internally won state has been carried over. It is a lamp that informs the player. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 tells the player that this game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game role, which is one of the winning roles, is won in the previous game. It is a lamp that informs you. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, one bet button 130 is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. If it is pressed once, one sheet is inserted, if it is pressed once in succession, one additional sheet (two sheets in total) is inserted, and if it is pressed once in succession, one additional sheet (three sheets in total) is inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as a single bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the following, it may be expressed that it is given to the player in the same meaning as being paid out to the player. The game information display 126 and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a push order. Further, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is the "forward push operation order" or simply. The stop operation is called "forward push", and the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110. Called "operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display for displaying information regarding the operation order (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. The instruction monitor 125 is also composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 in this order, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125, and the left stop button 137, the right stop button 139, and the middle stop button 139 are displayed. When instructing to operate in the order of the stop buttons 138, "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor 125.

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted game medal (number of bets) to the medal number control unit 350. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

The game medal number display device 170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, and is a device that displays the number of game medals recorded by the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG.

The counting button 171 is an operating means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded by the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2 to the lending machine 700.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 2) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 2) to the outside is provided above the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal) arranged behind the shutter 163. A display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed on the front side of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ) Has a structure that appears. It should be noted that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device but may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface. The effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of the effect means.

The rental machine 700 shown in FIG. 1 is sometimes referred to as a card unit, and corresponds to an example of the game medium management device of the present invention. The rental machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100.

The lending machine 700 accepts the card. There are two types of "cards" here. One is a visitor card (also called a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a storage medium for games issued to general players who have not registered as a member. The other is a membership card, which is a storage medium for games, issued to member players who have registered as members in the amusement park. As the card, an IC card is used.

Valuable value is stored in the card. The valuable value stored in the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "money balance" which is the balance of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that has received the card has a function of converting the "number of medals held" stored in the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)".

The “number of game medals (number of credits)” is data that can be used for setting the number of bets and can be converted into the “number of medals held”. The "number of game medals" can be obtained by deducting the "money balance" or "number of medals held" of the card. In addition, the "number of game medals" includes the number of medals won by winning a prize. This "number of game medals" is managed by the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2, and is the number of electronic medals stored electromagnetically (the amount of electronic game value). The "number of game medals" is subtracted by performing the insertion operation with the bet buttons 130 and 132.

The "number of medals held" is a value obtained by counting and converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)". This "number of medals held" is identifiable and stored by the player's card. That is, by operating the counting button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals possessed" and can be stored in the card. The "number of medals held" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals held in the amusement park.

On the front side of the lending machine 700, a bill insertion slot 701 for inserting bills upward and a card insertion slot 702 for inserting cards below are provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 is accepted by the card reader / writer, and the information stored in the card is read. The authenticity and type of the bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 701 are identified, and the face value of the bill is stored in the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702 as a "money balance".

An information display 703 is provided below the bill insertion slot 701. The information display 703 is a display for providing operation guidance of the rental machine 700, a state of the slot machine 100, and the like in characters and images. The surface may be composed of a touch panel, and various operations may be input by touching the displayed various display items with a finger.

Below the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal number balance display 706 are arranged in two upper and lower stages. On the money balance display 705, the "money balance" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 is displayed as an amount. On the other hand, on the medal number balance display 706, the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 is displayed as the number of medals.

A lending button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided at the central portion of the lending machine 700 in the vertical direction. The lending button 707 is an operation means for performing an operation for obtaining a "game medal number" by withdrawing the "money balance" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702. Specifically, when the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 has a "money balance", the LED lamp built in the lending button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that the card can be withdrawn. By operating the lending button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the amount of money to be withdrawn. For example, the "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as a predetermined amount. If the "money balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "game medal number" converted from the current balance at the predetermined rate is added. Even if the "money balance" of the card is less than the specified amount, even if the "number of medals" stored in the card is replenished and the "game medal number" for the specified amount is added. good. The card return button 708 is operated when the player ends the game, and the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 stores the "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game and ejects the card. Is. The "number of medals held" determined at the end of the game is counted after subtracting the number of medals converted from the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 to the "number of game medals". The number of medals is the sum of the number of game medals counted by the operation.

The data of "money balance", "number of medals held", and "number of game medals" described above are in the order of "money balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held". It will be converted. In this way, the number of medals is converted into the "number of game medals" according to the "number of medals possessed" specified by the card, and the slot machine 100 in the present embodiment can set the number of bets using the "number of game medals". Therefore, players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines that receive a loan of a real medal, insert the real medal to secure credits, and set the number of bets using the credits are confused. It is possible to provide a game by a new slot machine (managed game machine) that does not use a real medal without giving.

Although the "number of medals saved" is not mentioned in this specification, the "number of medals saved" is the number of medals held in the amusement park, not stored in the card. At the amusement park, the number of medals held by the player in the game is managed as "points" during the day by the hall management terminal 800 and other management computers shown in FIG. It may be managed as a "number". If both the "number of medals saved" and the "number of medals held" are stored, the "number of medals held" will be deducted preferentially. Further, both the "number of medals held" and the "number of accumulated medals" may be stored in the upper server (intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 3) in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of medals held" is stored directly in the visitor card, but the "number of medals held" may be stored in the upper server in correspondence with the card number. When storing the data in correspondence with the card number in the higher server, data that can specify the time stored in the higher server may be written in the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. In addition, the "money balance" is written directly on the card (membership card, visitor card) and discharged. The timing for storing the "number of medals" in the card (membership card, visitor card) or the upper server is, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is operated to perform the counting process. However, instead of this, the cards may be collectively stored when they are returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 700 is temporarily stored in the hall management terminal 800 as a stored medal. When the player inserts the card into the same or another lending machine 700 again on the same day as the day when the card is returned, only the "number of medals held" for the day once stored as a stored medal is the lending machine again. It is stored in 700, and the "game medal number" may be added within the range of the "possessed medal number" so that the game can be played.

Further, the rental machine 700 may be provided with an IR photosensitive unit that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller possessed by a staff member of the amusement park, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the signal.

Further, in the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1, the "number of game medals" can be lent by operating the lending button 707 to withdraw the "money balance" stored in the card, but it is recorded on the card. The "number of medals held" may be deducted and converted into the "number of game medals". Specifically, the lending machine 700 is provided with a medal button, and if the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 has a "number of medals", the LED lamp built into the medal button can be pulled out. Lights up in a manner representing. By operating the holding medal button in this state, if the number of medals held is a predetermined number (for example, 50) or more, the "number of game medals" of the predetermined number (for example, 50) is added. In addition, as described above, the number of medals that the player has acquired in the game is stored in the card as "points" during the day, or is managed by the hall management terminal 800 or other management computer shown in FIG. The 700 is provided with a replay button. When there is a "holding point", the LED lamp built in the replay button lights up in a manner indicating that it can be pulled out. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (for example, 50) of "game medals" may be added.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, with respect to the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to confirm the program, and there is a problem of security deterioration such as becoming a hotbed for unauthorized modification. Therefore, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 And the data capacity of the RAM 308 is limited.

<< Main control unit >>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game and a medal number control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of the game control means, and the medal number control unit 350 corresponds to an example of the game value number control means. The game control unit 302 includes a CPU 304, a control program data, a lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery for a winning combination, a ROM 306 that stores a reel symbol arrangement, a stop position, and the like, and a RAM 308 that temporarily stores the data. It is equipped with an I / O 310 for controlling the input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the medal number control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output by a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is powered on by a random number generator circuit (not shown) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown). Then, a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 performs game control when a start signal is input from this start signal output circuit. Start (start the main control unit main processing described later).

Further, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the states of the bet buttons 130 and 132, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the settlement button 134 for each interrupt time. For example, when it is detected that the bet buttons 130 and 132 are turned on, a process of electronically inserting the medals electronically stored in the medal number control unit 350 as medals to be inserted into the game is executed. When it is detected that the start lever 135 is turned on, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit. The random number generation circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in the register that stores the random number value used for the lottery. When it is detected that the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, or the right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stoptable state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Take control. When it is detected that the settlement button 134 is turned on, a process of returning the electronically inserted game medal to the medal number control unit 350 is executed.

The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 also monitors the status of various sensors 318 (optical sensor on the left reel 110, optical sensor on the middle reel 111, optical sensor on the right reel 112, etc.) for each interruption time. ing. The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and are provided on the reel frame to block light. Every time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotation position information indicating how much the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level to the next L level is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. Will be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero. This rotation position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, an instruction monitor 125, a game information display 126, and a drive circuit 324 for driving display devices such as the payout number display 127. A drive circuit 326 for driving the lamp 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121) is provided.

Further, in the slot machine 100, set values having different degrees of advantage for the player are set. As the setting value, setting 1 to setting 6 are prepared. The higher the set value, the higher the advantage of the player tends to be. Specifically, the internal winning probability is determined for each set value. A setting change button 175 that is operated when changing this set value is connected to the game control unit 302.

Further, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control unit 302, and the main control unit 300 is provided with an information input circuit provided by an external hall computer 600 (see FIG. 3) or the like via the information output circuit 328. The game information of the slot machine 100 (for example, information indicating the state of the game) is output to the 650.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and this voltage monitoring circuit is a power supply. When the voltage value of is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350, respectively.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

Like the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350 also has a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I / O 360 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 362. The CPU 304 and the CPU 354 are provided on the same substrate and are connected via a buffer IC. As a result, the CPU 304 is made to use the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 are not used, and the CPU 354 is made to use the ROM 356 and the RAM 358, and the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 are not used. A WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) is also installed. Further, the CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined, and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 354 for each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates on the occasion of this interrupt request. The medal number control unit 350 executes an interrupt process (a medal number control unit timer interrupt process described later) at 0.745 ms. In addition, communication with the lending machine 700 is repeated at a cycle of 300 ms.

The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also has a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 also outputs this start signal. When the start signal is input from the circuit, the medal number control is started (the medal number control unit main process described later is started).

A game medal number display device 170 composed of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a counting button 171 and a game medal number clear button 172 are connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control unit 350.

Further, the rental machine 700 is also connected to the basic circuit of the medal number control unit 350 via the rental machine connection terminal plate 790. The medal number control unit 350 performs two-way communication with the lending machine 700.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits various commands to the game control unit 302. The game control unit 302 also transmits various commands to the medal number control unit 350. That is, the communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 is also bidirectional communication.

Further, the medal number control unit 350 stores the "game medal number" in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. Specifically, the "number of game medals" is stored in the credit counter. The medal number control unit 350 updates the "game medal number" stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 358 by the addition process or the subtraction process. The addition process includes processing based on the payout command transmitted from the game control unit 302, processing based on the settlement command transmitted from the game control unit 302, and processing based on the lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700. Can be given. On the other hand, examples of the subtraction process include a counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171 and a processing based on the input command transmitted from the game control unit 302.

The game medal number clear button 172 shown in FIG. 2 is provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player (for example, a position that cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened), and is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. It is an operation means for clearing the "number of game medals" stored in. For example, if a player is absent with "2" remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player who has left "2" intends to continue the game, and another player becomes Although it became impossible to start the game, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the operation of the clerk, another player can be welcomed at an early stage. It should be noted that when the game medal number clear button 172 is operated, the "game medal number" is not always cleared. For example, when the number of game medals is 2 or less, it is cleared, and if there are 3 or more medals. , Counting may be performed in the same manner as when the counting button 171 is operated. If there is a failure in the counting button 171 and it becomes impossible to recognize that the counting button 171 has been operated, the "number of game medals" cannot be converted into the "number of medals held", which may be disadvantageous to the player. However, if the counting is possible even by the operation of the clerk, the player will not be disadvantaged. Further, since it is not necessary to newly provide a counting button for the clerk, the cost does not increase. It should be noted that the number of game medals is not determined and the clear and the count are separated, and the clear and the count may be separated by the operation method of the game medal number clear button 172. For example, it is cleared when it is pressed for a short time, and it is counted when it is pressed for a long time. You can easily select either clear or count regardless of the number of game medals. Further, it is cleared when only the game medal number clear button 172 is operated, and is counted when the game medal number clear button 172 and other buttons are operated at the same time. It is unlikely that you will make a mistake in the operation, and you can easily select either clear or count.

《Sub-control unit》
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 (game control unit 302) via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and the basic circuit 402 temporarily stores data with the CPU 404. RAM 408, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277. It should be noted that these speakers 272 and 277 correspond to an example of the directing means.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, etc.) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. Reel backlight, etc.) is connected. The various lamps 420 correspond to an example of the directing means.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various effect drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). ), Etc., and may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512 and. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram of a game system including the slot machine 100 and the rental machine 700 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game system S includes a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a rental machine 700 also shown in FIG. 1, a hall computer 600, a hall management terminal 800, an intermediate management terminal 810, and a management server 820. The rental machine 700, the hall computer 600, and the hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it has a storage means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer different from the hall computer 600, is installed in each of the amusement parks (halls) H1, H2, ..., And is connected to the rental machine 700. Since the rental machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100, the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the rental machine 700. Information (counting information and lending information) regarding the number of medals performed between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 and information such as the operating state of the slot machine 100 are input to the hall management terminal 800. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages the input information.

The management server 820 is provided to comprehensively manage the game system 1, and includes information regarding the slot machine 100 and the rental machine 700, for example, information for identifying the slot machine 100 and information for identifying the rental machine 700 (game machine). Installation information) is memorized and this information is managed. Further, the management server 820 is connected to the hall management terminal 800 of many stores via the intermediate management terminal 810, and information obtained by communicating with the hall management terminal 800, that is, information on the number of medals and slots. It also manages information such as the operating status of the machine 100.

<< Communication sequence and communication content >>
Commands are transmitted and received between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350. The game control unit 302 transmits a game control unit command (game control state command, game control priority command) to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. On the other hand, the medal number control unit 350 transmits a medal number control command (medal number control state command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. In the game control unit 302, the game control priority command is transmitted in preference to the game control state command. Further, in the medal number control unit 350, the response command corresponding to the game control priority command is transmitted in preference to the medal number control state command.

In the communication between the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 and the communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, game machine status information, game machine performance information, and game machine installation information are transmitted and received. NS.

FIG. 4 is a table summarizing the gaming machine status information, the gaming machine performance information, and the gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine state information shown in FIG. 4A is roughly divided into three state information such as advantageous state information, setting state information, and front door state information. The advantageous state information includes information indicating whether or not the bonus operating state is equivalent to RB (RB information), information indicating whether or not the bonus operating state is equivalent to BB (BB information), and the bonus operating state equivalent to AT (assist time). It is composed of information (AT information) indicating whether or not. The setting status information includes information indicating whether or not the setting is being changed (setting changing information) and information indicating whether or not the setting is being confirmed (setting is being confirmed) by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. Information). The front door state information is information (door opening information) indicating whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 4B includes total input number information, total payout number information, MY counter value information, total bonus payout number information, continuous bonus total payout number information, game count information, and role ratio. Contains monitor information. The total number of inserted medals is information indicating the cumulative number of medals inserted since the power was turned on. The number of medals for replay is not included. The total number of medals to be paid out is information indicating the number of medals to be paid out accumulated since the power was turned on. The number of medals for replay is not included. The MY counter value information is information representing the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power is turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which notification of the stop operation order is executed for the internally won combination, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals after the transition to this state. The total number of medals to be paid out is information indicating the number of medals to be paid out due to the operation of the medals accumulated from the power on. The information on the total number of continuous accessories paid out is information indicating the number of medals paid out due to the operation of the RB accumulated from the power-on. The game count information is information representing the number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. The role ratio monitor information is information representing various ratios (role ratio, continuous character ratio, advantageous section ratio, instruction-added character ratio, condition ratio of characters, etc.) for evaluating the degree of gambling of the gaming machine. become.

The gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 4C includes two types of information, game control unit information and medal number control unit information. The game control unit information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the game control unit 302, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip. The medal number control unit information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the medal number control unit 350, the manufacturer code of the IC chip, and the product code of the IC chip.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control state command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

FIG. 5 shows the first sub-control unit 400, the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350, and the lending machine 700 from the left.

First, before explaining the game control state command, the communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be described. A medal number control unit 350 is connected to the lending machine 700, and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. Communication between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is performed in a cycle of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 5, a game machine information notification and a counting notification are transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. Further, the lending machine 700 sends a lending notice to the medal number control unit 350, and upon receiving the lending notice, the medal number control unit 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing details of communication performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700.

FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a data structure of a telegram exchanged by communication performed between the medal number control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. This telegram consists of five types: telegram length, command, serial number, data section, and checker. The length of the entire telegram is stored in the telegram length. The command stores a command code for identifying the types of the gaming machine information notification, the counting notification, the lending notification, and the lending reception result response notification. In the serial number, the serial number is stored in the gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number is stored in the counting notification, and the lending serial number is stored in the lending notification and the lending reception result response notification. The range of various serial numbers is 0 to 255. When the power is turned on, the serial number becomes 0, and when it reaches 255, it returns to 1, and then repeats from 1 to 255. Various types of data are stored in the data section, and the lower 1 byte of the total is stored in the checksum by adding the data from the telegram length to the data section.

FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data unit of the gaming machine information notification. In the data section of the game machine information notification, a code indicating the type of a pachinko-type game machine, a spinning-type game machine, an arrange ball game machine, or the like is stored. In the case of the present embodiment, a code representing a spinning machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hall control / fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and the gaming machine installation information described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information is the information.

FIG. 7A is a diagram showing details of hall control / fraud monitoring information.

The game medal number information is information indicating the current number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350.

The information on the number of inserted medals varies depending on the number of inserted medals and the number of returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see FIG. 1) is operated and there is a return medal. It becomes the information of the minute (-3 to 3 sheets). That is, it is information based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the information on the number of settlements, which is included in the game control priority command (insertion command, settlement command) transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The information on the number of medals to be paid out is information indicating the number of medals to be paid out. This payout medal number information is information based on the information on the number of medals to be paid out, which is included in the game control priority command (payout command) transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 4A described with reference to FIG. In addition, information indicating the state of the gaming machine may be included.

The gaming machine error status information is information represented by an error code.

FIG. 7B is a list of error codes. Regarding the various errors shown in FIG. 7B, the number of medals control status command, various processing commands transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the game control priority command (error), which will be described later, will be described. It is also handled by the generation command).

Hereinafter, only the errors that need special explanation will be described. The medal number control disconnection is an error when the game control unit 302 detects the disconnection of the medal number control unit 350, and the game control disconnection is the opposite, and the medal number control unit 350 disconnects the game control unit 302. It is an error when it is detected. The game order abnormality is an error that the game progress order in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. The game control command serial number abnormality is an error that the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous value. The payout number abnormality is an error when the payout number included in the game control state command is out of the range of 0 or more and 15 or less. That is, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, the maximum number of cards to be paid out at one time is 15. The settlement number mismatch is an error when the settlement number included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is more than the input number. The chip ID number mismatch is an error when the IC chip number information in the game control unit information shown in FIG. 4C is different from the previous information. The medal number control RAM error is an error indicating a defect of the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350. The lending machine communication abnormality is an error that the lending notification is not received even though the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is on, which will be described in detail later. When various errors shown in FIG. 7B occur, the 7 segments of the instruction monitor 125 shown in FIG. 1 are all lit, and the error notification sound is output from the speaker 272. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an error code for display.

The game machine fraud information includes the setting state information and the front door information shown in FIG. 4A described with reference to FIG. 4, information when fraud is detected, and the fact that the number of game medals has been cleared. It contains information and security signals indicating that fraud is being detected.

The information on the number of game information becomes the information on the number of bets and the information on the number of payouts. These two pieces of information are distinguished by type information. The current bet number is included in the start lever reception command when the operation of the start lever 135 is received and the start lever reception command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. It will be the value of the current bet number. Further, the number of payouts is the value of the number of payouts included in the payout command when the payout command (game control state command) is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 6B, the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms includes the gaming machine information of the code specified by the gaming machine information type. It is stored. That is, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the gaming machine installation information, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the hall controller. -Fraud monitoring information is stored. The notification intervals of the gaming machine performance information, the gaming machine installation information, and the hall control / fraud monitoring information are different, and the gaming machine performance information is notified once in the longest first time (for example, 180 seconds). The gaming machine installation information is notified once in the second time (for example, 60 seconds), and the hall control / fraud monitoring information is notified every shortest third time (for example, 300 ms of the notification cycle). When the notification timings of these three pieces of information overlap, the notification of the gaming machine installation information has the highest priority, and then the notification of the gaming machine performance information has the highest priority. The lowest priority is the hall control / fraud monitoring information, which has the highest number of notifications.

FIG. 6C is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data unit of the counting notification transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at a cycle of 300 ms. As shown in FIG. 5, the counting notification is notified within a range of 90 ms or more and 100 ms or less from the start of the notification of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a counting notification interval timer in which 90 ms is set in step S3303 shown in FIG. 30 to be described later. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the counting button 171 shown in FIG. 1 is short-pressed once, the number of counting sheets is increased by one, and when the counting button 171 is short-pressed a plurality of times until the cycle of 300 ms is reached. , The number of medals for the number of short presses becomes the number of counts. On the other hand, when the cycle of 300 ms arrives while the count button 171 is pressed and held for 500 ms or more, the number of counts becomes 50. That is, the number of sheets to be counted can be set in units of one, or 50 can be set at a time. However, if the number of counting medals exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of counting medals. The counting medal number information is information representing the number of counting medals determined by the operation of the counting button 171 until the cycle of 300 ms arrives. The total number of counted medals is information representing the cumulative number of counted medals since the power is turned on.

FIG. 6D is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data unit of the lending notification transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 at a cycle of 300 ms. As shown in FIG. 5, the lending machine 700 notifies the medal number control unit 350 of the lending notification within 170 ms from the start of receiving the counting notification. The medal number control unit 350 monitors whether or not the loan notification is notified within 170 ms by the loan notification interval timer in which 170 ms is set in step S3502 shown in FIG. 32, which will be described later. When the lending button 707 of the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1 is operated, if the "money balance" of the card is a predetermined amount (for example, 1000 yen) or more, the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount (for example, 50) Is the number of medals to be rented. On the other hand, if the "money balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at the predetermined rate becomes the number of medals to be lent. The loan medal number information is information indicating the number of loan medals corresponding to the operation of the loan button 707 in this way. The predetermined amount of medals and the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount can be set in advance by the lending machine 700.

FIG. 6E is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data unit of the loan receipt result response returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. As will be described in detail later, in the medal number control unit 350, the number of rented medals notified by the lending notification is 50 or less, or the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 is less than the lending threshold value (for example, 15,000). It is determined whether or not the counting process is performed, and the result of receiving the number of medals to be lent is determined to be either normal or abnormal. In the loan receipt result response, this receipt result is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

Subsequently, the game control state command that the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 5 transmits to the medal number control unit 350 every 2.98 ms will be described.

FIG. 8 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control state command is a 16-bit command, in which the most significant bit of the high-order byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining high-order 7 bits represent the command type, and the low-order byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 8 also shows the command offset used at the time of transmission.

The game control unit 302 transmits a command indicating advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms, issues a command indicating setting state information (setting changing information, setting checking information). After 2.98 ms, a command indicating front door status information (door opening information) is transmitted. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine status information.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the information representing the total number of input sheets in 3 bytes (total number of input sheet information) is divided into 3 times for each byte and transmitted at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, when the upper byte sends the first byte with the command type of 13H and 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte transmits the second byte with the command type of 14H, and when 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte sends 15H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of.

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of payouts in 3 bytes (total payout number information) is transmitted in 3 batches of 1 byte at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, when the upper byte transmits the first byte with the command type of 16H and 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte transmits the second byte with the command type of 17H, and when 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte sends 18H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of.

Then, when 2.98 ms elapses, the information representing the MY counter value in 3 bytes (MY counter value information) is transmitted in 3 times for each byte at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, when the upper byte transmits the first byte with the command type of 19H and 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte transmits the second byte with the command type of 1 AH, and when 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte sends 1 BH. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of.

Further, after 2.98 ms, the information representing the total number of bonuses paid out in 3 bytes (information on the total number of bonuses paid out) in 3 bytes is divided into 3 times for each byte and the interval is 2.98 ms. Send with. That is, when the upper byte transmits the first byte with the command type of 1CH and 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte transmits the second byte with the command type of 1 DH, and when 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte sends 1 EH. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the total number of continuous bonuses paid out in 3 bytes (information on the total number of continuous bonuses paid out) is transmitted in 3 times for each byte at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, when the upper byte transmits the first byte with the command type of 1FH and 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte transmits the second byte with the command type of 20H, and when 2.98 ms elapses, the upper byte sends 21H. Send the 3rd byte with the command type of.

Subsequently, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, information representing the number of games played in 2 bytes (game number information) is divided into two times for each byte and transmitted at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is transmitted with the command type in which the upper byte is 22H, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is transmitted with the command type in which the upper byte is 23H.

Then, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the combination monitor information is transmitted over 5 commands at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, the upper byte transmits information indicating the accessory ratio with the command type of 24H, the upper byte transmits information indicating the continuous accessory ratio with the command type of 25H, and the upper byte transmits information indicating the continuous accessory ratio with the command type of 26H, and the advantageous section ratio. The information representing the accessory ratio is transmitted with the command type of 27H in the upper byte, and the information representing the state ratio of the accessory etc. is transmitted in the command type of 28H in the upper byte. This completes the transmission of gaming machine performance information.

Further, when 2.98 ms has elapsed, the game control unit information is transmitted over 15 commands at an interval of 2.98 ms. That is, the information representing the IC chip ID number of the game control unit 302 in 4 bytes is transmitted in 4 times for each byte at an interval of 2.98 ms. Next, the information representing the IC chip maker code of the game control unit 302 in 3 bytes is transmitted in 3 times for each byte at an interval of 2.98 ms. Subsequently, the information representing the IC chip product code of the game control unit 302 in 8 bytes is transmitted in 8 times for each byte at an interval of 2.98 ms. This completes the transmission of gaming machine installation information.

Finally, send the checksum value. When the transmission of the check sum value is completed, the transmission of the advantageous state information is returned, and thereafter, the game control state commands shown in FIG. 8 are repeatedly transmitted one by one at 2.98 ms intervals. If there is a game control priority command, the transmission of the game control status command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Subsequently, the medal number control state command that the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 5 transmits to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms will be described.

FIG. 9 is a table showing the medal number control state command.

The medal number control state command is also a 16-bit command, in which the most significant bit of the high-order byte is used as a strobe signal, the remaining high-order 7 bits represent the command type, and the low-order byte represents the content. Note that FIG. 9 also shows the command offset used at the time of transmission.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in the ON state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information and may include other information.

Next, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, the information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 in 2 bytes is divided into 1 byte each at the upper and lower levels and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. That is, the lower byte is transmitted with the command type of 02H, and after 5.96 ms, the upper byte is transmitted with the command type of 03H.

Then, when 5.96 ms has elapsed, information indicating the number of sheets to be counted (counted number information) is transmitted, and after 5.96 ms has elapsed, information indicating the number of rented sheets (information on the number of rented sheets) is transmitted.

Finally, the error code described with reference to FIG. 7B is transmitted. When the transmission of the error code is completed, the transmission of the VL signal information is returned, and thereafter, the medal number control status command shown in FIG. 9 is repeatedly transmitted in order every 5.96 ms. If there is a response command to the game control priority command, the transmission of the medal number control status command is interrupted until this command is transmitted.

Next, a security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 shown in FIG. 5 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a cycle of 100 ms will be described.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is on, door opening information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state, and "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358. Information indicating the number of sheets to be represented, information indicating the number of sheets to be counted, information indicating the number of sheets to be rented, and the like are included. The information indicating the "number of game medals", the information indicating the number of counted medals, and the information indicating the number of rented medals are the information transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 by the medal number control state command.

In addition, various processing commands are also transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400. Various processing commands include, for example, a normal return command at the time of power recovery, a setting change start command related to setting value change, a setting change end command including the changed setting value, an error occurrence command and an error release command, and the number of input commands. A bet command including, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed, an effect information command including effect information, a start lever reception command indicating that the operation of the start button 135 has been accepted, and stop buttons 137 to 139. Examples include the first to third pressing commands associated with the acceptance of operations, game information commands including game information, and payout start commands indicating the start of payout. The errors in the error generation command and the error cancellation command include the error represented by the error code described with reference to FIG. 7B, the error near the upper limit of the number of game medals displayed, and the door with the front door 102 opened. It includes an opening error, a lending machine abnormality error in which the VL signal is turned off, and the like.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

The game control priority command is a command that is transmitted with priority over the game control status command. If the medal control unit 350 requests retransmission after the game control priority command is transmitted, the game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350 again.

FIG. 11A is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command.

As for the game control priority command, a response command is returned from the medal number control unit 350 when it is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the medal number control status command is continuously transmitted without returning this response command. There are two types, one and the other. The former game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is referred to as a game control priority command 2. FIG. 10 shows a communication sequence when the game control priority command 1 is transmitted.

The game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an input command, and a settlement command. The payout command sends the number of payouts (0 to 15) with the command type with the upper byte 04H, then sends the command serial number with the command type with the upper byte 05H, and finally the command type with the upper byte 06H. Send a checksum with. That is, in the transmission of the payout command, three commands are continuously transmitted.

The input command sends the number of input sheets (0 to 3 sheets) with the command type with the upper byte of 07H, then sends the command serial number with the command type with the upper byte of 08H, and finally the command type with the upper byte of 09H. Send a checksum with. That is, even when the input command is transmitted, three commands are continuously transmitted.

The settlement command sends the number of settlements (0 to 3) with the command type with the upper byte 0AH, then sends the command serial number with the command type with the upper byte 0BH, and finally the command type with the upper byte 0CH. Send a checksum with. That is, even when the settlement command is transmitted, three commands are continuously transmitted.

When the medal number control unit 350 shown in FIG. 10 receives the game control priority command 1, it transmits a response command.

FIG. 11B is a diagram showing details of a response command returned from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302.

The response command is sent in response to the payout command (payout response), in response to the input command (input response), and in response to the settlement command (settlement response). There is. In the response command, the value of the high-order byte that is the value of the command type is 00H. The payout response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and rerequest of the payout command. The normality here corresponds to the completion of payout, and the abnormality corresponds to the case where the number of game medals exceeds the payout threshold value (for example, 16383 medals) due to the payout.

The input response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-request of the input command. It should be noted that the normal condition here corresponds to the completion of charging, and the abnormality corresponds to the failure of charging or the invalidation of charging.

The settlement response is a response command that includes any one of normal, abnormal, and re-requesting the settlement command. The normality here corresponds to the completion of settlement, and the abnormality corresponds to the case where the number of game medals exceeds the settlement threshold value (for example, 16383) by settlement. The settlement threshold is a threshold having the same value as the above-mentioned payout threshold.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the game control priority command 2 is transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type in which the upper byte is 01H, and includes the occurrence of various errors shown in FIG. 7B.

The RAM clear command is a command type in which the upper byte is 02H, and includes the normal RAM 308 determined by the game control unit 302 or the RAM 308 defect determined by the game control unit 302.

The start lever reception command is a command type in which the upper byte is 03H, and since the bet number is fixed when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, information indicating the fixed bet number (current bet number: 1 to 3) is included. Command.

《Design arrangement》
A plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the reels 110 to 112 by a predetermined number of frames. The slot machine 100 in the present embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum retractable range from the stop-operated position in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

<< Types of winning roles >>
The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role, a replaying role, and a small role. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

<< Types of internal winners >>
In a game, an internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the start of the game, and in the game, a winning combination corresponding to this internal winning combination can be won. Depending on the role, the result of the internal winning may be carried over to the next game.

《Type of game state》
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states having different advantages, and the advantages are changed by the transition of these states to improve the enjoyment of the game.

<< Outline of processing >>
Hereinafter, the processing of the game control unit 302, the medal number control unit 350, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a so-called medalless configuration is adopted in which information corresponding to the number of actual medals (number of virtual medals) is used without using actual medals. The description "number" will be used.

<< Game control unit main processing >>
First, the game control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the game control unit.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 that has input the start signal starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main process of the game control unit shown in FIG. 13 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the initial setting of the stack to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the setting of interrupt prohibition, the initial setting of the I / O 310, and the initial setting of various variables (including the MY counter described later) stored in the RAM 308. , Allow operation to WDT314 and set initial values. When the setting is changed, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. Also, when it is determined that the backup data of the RAM 308 is abnormal in the restoration process, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information on whether or not the initialization is completed normally is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S102, the medal insertion / start lever reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S103, a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery (role lottery) is performed using this and the random number value acquired from the random number value generation circuit 316. , Determine the internal winners. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the winning combination flag is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control unit 302.

In step S106, the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on condition that the game interval timer (subtracted by the timer update process described later) is 0, and the initial value is set in the game interval timer. Further, at the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, preparations are made for transmitting a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed, the optical sensor provided on each reel is detected, and the symbol position of each reel is grasped, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. The game interval counter secures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 s in the present embodiment) and suppresses gambling.

In step S107, the reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time the stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, the reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared for the first stop operation, and the reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared for the second stop operation. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) to the first sub-control unit 400 for each stop operation, and the corresponding command (first to third pressing command) is made every time the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S108.

In step S108, the winning determination process is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, the medal granting process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S110, the game state control process is performed. Here, the status related to the game state is updated based on the result of the game.

This completes one game. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the details of the medal insertion / start lever reception process (step S102) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the medal insertion / start lever reception process (step S102) in FIG.

First, in step S1001 executed first, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if there is any error status, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, the error notification process corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1003, one interrupt time standby process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited and the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting key is accepted. If the operation of the setting key is accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006, and if the operation of the setting key is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1006, the process of confirming the acceptance of the operation of the setting key is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in a state of being always on. The game control unit 302 grasps the state of the VL signal based on the information transmitted from the medal number control unit 350. If the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted. If the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if the operation of the start lever 135 is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This re-game flag is a flag that is set to be turned on when a re-game is won and a re-game is given. If the re-game flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the re-game flag is on, the medal insertion / start lever acceptance process ends.

In step S1010, the current bet number (current bet number) and the number required to start the game (startable number) are compared. If the current bet number is smaller than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1011. If the current bet number is equal to or greater than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1011, the medal insertion processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again. The details of the process during medal insertion will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1013. The value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is the start lever reception command.

In step S1013, the current bet number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, the priority command transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1015, the start lever reception command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the medal insertion / start lever reception process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the details of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in the medal insertion / start lever reception process of FIG. 14 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 executed first, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement button 134 is accepted. If the operation of the settlement button 134 is accepted, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if the operation of the settlement button 134 is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1102, the settlement button process is executed, and the medal insertion process is terminated. The details of the settlement button processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the operation of any of the bet buttons 130 and 132 has been accepted. If the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 is accepted, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 is not accepted, the medal insertion processing is terminated.

In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This re-game flag is a flag that is set to be turned on when a re-game is won and a re-game is given. If the re-game flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if the re-game flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1105, 0 is set as the required number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1106. The requested number of medals is a value used for setting the number of medals exchanged with the medal number control unit 350.

In step S1106, the current bet number and the maximum bet number (3 in the present embodiment) are compared. If the current bet number is not the same as the maximum bet number, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the current bet number is equal to the maximum bet number, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1107, a value obtained by subtracting the current bet number from the maximum bet number is set as the required number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether or not the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have accepted the operation are the single bet buttons 130. If the bet buttons 130 and 132 determined to have accepted the operation are single bet buttons 130, the process proceeds to step S1109, and otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1109, 1 is set as the required number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1110.

In steps S1105 to S1109 described above, if the current bet number is the maximum bet number, the requested number of bets becomes 0. Further, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated while the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number, the requested number is 3 when the current bet number is 0 with respect to the maximum bet number 3, and the current bet number is 1. If the required number of sheets is 2, and the current number of bets is 2, the requested number of sheets is 1. Further, when the single bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number, the requested number is 1.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1111. The value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is an input command.

In step S1111, the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1112. The details of the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1112, a response result to the command transmitted in step S1111 is awaited, and it is determined whether or not this result is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1113, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1113, the required number of bets is added to the current number of bets, and the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1114, the bet button acceptance command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and the medal insertion processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the details of the settlement button process (step S1102) in the medal insertion process of FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the settlement button process (step S1102) in FIG.

First, in step S1201 to be executed first, the settlement button reception command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the replay flag is on. This re-game flag is a flag that is set to be turned on when a re-game is won and a re-game is given. If the re-game flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the re-game flag is on, the settlement button process is terminated.

In step S1203, the requested number and the current bet number are set, and the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1205. The value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is a settlement command.

In step S1205, the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1206. The details of the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the response result to the command transmitted in step S1205 is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1207, and if the response result is not "normal", the settlement button process is terminated.

In step S1207, the current bet number is set to 0, and the settlement button process ends.

Next, using FIG. 17, the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion process of FIG. 15 (step S1111) and the variation information transmission process to the medal number control unit in the settlement button process of FIG. 16 (step S1205). ), The details of the variation information transmission process (step S1605) to the medal number control unit in the medal awarding process of FIG. 20 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the variation information transmission process (step S1111, step S1205, step S1605) addressed to the medal number control unit in FIGS. 15, 16, and 20.

First, in step S1301 executed first, an initial value (4 in this embodiment) is set in the value of the remaining number of transmissions, and the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process proceeds to step S1303. The response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal number control unit 350, but if it is not overwritten (no response), it indicates that it is "abnormal".

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is any error status, the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit is terminated, and if there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, an initial value (a value corresponding to 100 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the response standby timer, and the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, the value of the remaining number of transmissions is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307, and if the value of the remaining number of transmissions is 0, the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit is terminated.

In step S1307, the triple command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1308. The details of this triple command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1308, if the value of the response standby timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1309, and if the value of the response standby timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S1303 again.

In step S1309, if the response from the medal number control unit 350 is received, the process proceeds to step S1310, and if not received, the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

In step S1310, if the reception result of the response from the medal number control unit 350 is "re-request", the process proceeds to step S1303 again, and if the reception result is other than that, the process proceeds to step S1311.

In step S1311, the reception result of the response from the medal number control unit 350 is stored as the response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is added by 1, and the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the details of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the variation information transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit of FIG. 17 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. Here, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands transmitted three times in a row, and in the present embodiment, each of the input command, the settlement command, and the payout command shown in FIG. 11A is three. It is a continuous command.

First, in step S1401 executed first, the checksum value is set (initialized) to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number of bytes is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, the priority command transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1404, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1405, the value of the upper byte among the contents (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is added by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the command serial number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, the priority command transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S1408, the checksum value is updated using the transmission content (lower byte).

In step S1409, the value of the upper byte among the contents (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 is added by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1411, the priority command transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, using FIG. 19, priority is given to the medal number control unit in the medal insertion / start lever reception process of FIG. 14 (step S1014) and the medal number control unit in the triple command transmission process of FIG. The details of the command transmission process (steps S1403, S1406, step S1409) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the priority command transmission process (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, step S1409) addressed to the medal number control unit in FIGS. 14 and 18.

First, in step S1501 executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit is empty. If the transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, this step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission content (2 bytes) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit, and the priority command transmission process addressed to the medal number control unit ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the details of the medal giving process (step S109) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the medal giving process (step S109) in FIG.

First, in step S1601, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if there is any error status, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the number of payouts is set as the required number of sheets, and the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, the error notification process corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1601 again.

In step S1604, 04H is set as the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1605. The value set here is used to indicate that the command to be transmitted is a payout command.

In step S1605, the variation information transmission process (FIG. 17) addressed to the medal number control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the response result to the command transmitted in step S1605 is "normal". If the response result is "normal", the process proceeds to step S1607, and if the response result is not "normal", the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1607, the payout command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and the medal granting process is completed.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow (cannot be added by payout) state is transmitted to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1601.

<< Game control unit timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the game control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the game control unit timer interrupt processing.

The game control unit 302 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 1.49 ms in this embodiment), and the game control unit timer allocation is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the game control unit timer is restarted (once every 1.49 ms, which is the interrupt cycle).

In step S203, the error monitoring process is executed. Here, processing is performed to deal with various errors such as an abnormality in the normal band with the medal number control unit 350 and an abnormality in the open / closed state of the door. If there is any error status, an error occurrence command including this error status information is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S204, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. The state of the optical sensor is confirmed by this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S206, the medal number control command reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In step S207, the game control command transmission process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In step S208, the effect command transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission in the main process of the game control unit 302, the timer interrupt process, and the like are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, and the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set) and bits 11. 18 to 14 are command types (for example, basic command, bet command, start lever reception command, internal winning command, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, and operation of stop buttons 137 to 139. 1st to 3rd press commands, 1st to 3rd stop commands associated with stopping reels 110 to 112, winning commands, payout number commands and payout completion commands associated with medal payout processing, game status update commands, etc.), bits 0 to 0 Reference numeral 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the game control unit 302, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S204, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, various lamps 336 and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S210, the security command transmission process is executed. Specifically, a security command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 every 100 ms cycle. This security command includes VL signal information indicating whether or not the VL signal is in the ON state, door opening information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state, and "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the number of sheets, information indicating the number of sheets to be counted, information indicating the number of sheets to be rented, and the like are included.

In step S211 the timer update process is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in each time unit, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S212, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is received (when the power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and when the low voltage signal is not received (when the power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S213. move on.

In step S213, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the game control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S214, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery, is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. The checksum value for a predetermined area including at least is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and the power supply status is set to "normal".

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 21, will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 21.

First, in step S2001, which is executed first, if the value of the disconnection determination timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the value of the disconnection determination timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2003, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2004, an initial value (a value corresponding to 20 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the disconnection determination timer, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the disconnection determination timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the value of the disconnection determination timer is not 1, the disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2006, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if there is any error status, the disconnection determination process is terminated.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal number control unit 350 is set as an error status, and the disconnection determination process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the details of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 21 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the medal number control command reception process (step S206) in FIG.

First, in step S2101, which is executed first, if the strobe signal transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is off, the medal number control command reception process is terminated.

In step S2102, the information of the RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal number control unit 350. These commands include six types of medal number control state commands (FIG. 9) and response commands (FIG. 11 (b)), and the command types can be identified by high-order bytes. That is, the command type is identified by referring to the high-order byte of the received command, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if there is any error status, the medal number control command reception process is terminated.

In step S2104, if the received command is a command including an error code (error code in the medal number control unit 350), the error code is set to the error status. If there is no error in the medal number control unit 350, an error code indicating that it is normal is set in the error status, but in this case, there is no error status.

Next, the details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG.

First, in step S2201 executed first, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 is empty. If the transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, the process proceeds to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 8) is repeatedly added and updated one by one within the range of 1 to 41 (1 after 41). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 8, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted in order from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the types of commands to be transmitted.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information to be the target of this command are read out to generate the transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether or not the command offset is 41. Of the 41 types of commands transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, the last command (the 41st command to be transmitted) is a check generated based on the transmission contents of the commands so far. It is Sam. That is, the checksum is updated when the command offset is 1 to 40 (step S2205), and when the command offset becomes 41, the updated checksum is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (step S2203, step S2205). S2207), the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above process, the process proceeds to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are output to the medal number control unit 350 (the I / O output port is updated). The information output here is received by the medal number control unit 350 side when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209 described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal for the medal number control unit 350 is off. If the strobe signal for the medal number control unit 350 is off, the process proceeds to step S2209, and if the strobe signal for the medal number control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal number control unit 350 is set to ON, and the game control state command transmission process is terminated.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 are cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2211.

In step S2211, the strobe signal for the medal number control unit 350 is set to off, and the game control state command transmission process ends.

<< Main processing of medal number control unit >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the medal number control unit main process executed by the CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the medal number control unit.

As described above, the medal number control unit 350 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 354 of the medal number control unit 350 that has input the start signal starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the medal number control unit main process shown in FIG. 25 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 356.

When the power is turned on, first, the power on process is performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage, access to the RAM 358 is permitted and an interrupt cycle is set. Will be done. Furthermore, the communication circuit is set.

In step S302, the RAM abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. The details of this RAM abnormality determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In step S303, the preparation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. The details of this preparatory process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In step S304, the game machine information notification transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S305. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S305, the count notification transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S306. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

In step S306, the reception confirmation process of the loan notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S307. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In step S307, if the loan notification receipt flag is on, the process proceeds to step S308, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304 again.

In step S308, the process of transmitting the loan receipt result response is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304 again. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the details of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 25.

First, in step S3001 executed first, if the power supply status is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3002, and if the power supply status is other than "normal", the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3002, the checksum value is derived based on the data in RAM 358, and the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power failure, and if these values are the same, it is determined that the checksum value is normal and the process proceeds to step S3004. If these values are different, it is determined that the checksum value is not normal, and the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3004, the normal RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. In the present embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processing, and as shown in FIG. 27, the normal RAM clear processing has the least number of clear targets. In addition to the area for storing information during the game, the RAM 358 has an area for storing hardware information such as a chip ID, an area for storing information related to the state of the game machine such as the ratio of advantageous sections, and receiving from the game control unit 302. There is a buffer that temporarily stores the stored information, but in the normal RAM clearing process, the area that mainly stores the information during the game is cleared.

In step S3005, the all RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3006. Of the four types of RAM clear processing, the total RAM clear processing has the largest number of clear targets, and as shown in FIG. 27, the entire area is cleared.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as RAM failure information, and the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3008.

In step S3008, if the game medal number clear button 172 is operated, the process proceeds to step S3009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating “detection” is set as the game medal number clear detection information, and the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to on.

In step S3012, execution of the interrupt process is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination process is repeatedly executed until the strobe signal on from the game control unit 302 is detected, and when the strobe signal on is detected, the process proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether or not the game control unit RAM clear command among the game control priority commands shown in FIG. 11A has been received. If this command is received, the process proceeds to step S3017, and if it is not received, the process proceeds to step S3020.

In step S3017, if the information included in the game control unit RAM clear command is information indicating clear “normal”, the process proceeds to step S3018, and if it is not information indicating “normal”, the process proceeds to step S3019.

In step S3018, the limited (2) RAM clearing process is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 27, the area excluding the chip information, the role ratio monitor information, and the like is cleared.

In step S3019, the limited (1) RAM clearing process is executed. In this process, as shown in FIG. 27, the area excluding the chip information and the like is cleared.

In step S3020, if the information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as the RAM failure information, the process proceeds to step S3021, and if the information indicating "RAM failure" is not stored as the RAM failure information, the RAM abnormality determination process is terminated. do.

In step S3021, information (error code E8) indicating "RAM failure" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S3022, the error request setting process is executed. The details of this error request setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

Next, the details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process and the like shown in FIG. 26 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 26 and the like.

First, in step S3101, which is executed first, if no error code is set in the error request, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if some error code is already set, the error request setting process is terminated.

In step S3102, the value (error code) of the error request setting value is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is “E9” shown in FIG. 7B, the process proceeds to step S3104, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3104, the lending machine communication error setting flag is set to on, and the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is “E7” shown in FIG. 7B, the process proceeds to step S3106, otherwise the error request setting process ends.

In step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to on, and this error request setting process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the details of the preparatory process (step S303) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the preparatory process (step S303) in FIG. 25.

First, in step S3201 executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of the medal number control unit 350 is updated. These pieces of information are stored in the ROM of the medal control unit.

In step S3203, the interrupt process is permitted.

In step S3204, this process is repeatedly executed while the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on, and when the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in the present embodiment) is set in the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer.

In step S3206, an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in the present embodiment) is set in the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG. 25.

First, in step S3301 to be executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the gaming machine information notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S3320.

In step S3302, an initial value (a value corresponding to 300.98 ms in the present embodiment) is set in the gaming machine information notification interval timer.

In step S3303, a value corresponding to 90 ms is set in the value of the count notification interval timer.

In step S3304, the value of the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting determination.

In step S3305, the gaming machine information type acquisition process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

In step S3306, preparations are made for transmission of various gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type. Specifically, when the value of the gaming machine information type is 0, the transmission of the gaming machine performance information is prepared, and when the value of the gaming machine information type is 1, the transmission of the gaming machine installation information is prepared and the game is played. If the value of the machine information type is 2, prepare for transmission of hall computer / fraud monitoring information.

In step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, the process proceeds to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3308, the value of the number of inserted medals is set to 0.

In step S3309, the value of the number of medals to be paid out is set to 0.

In step S3310, the value of the number of game information is set to 0.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various game machine information (message length, command type, game machine information serial number, game machine type, game machine information type, game machine) prepared for transmission in step S3306 according to the game machine information type. Information, checksum) (see FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b)) are sequentially transmitted. The checksum is a value updated based on the contents transmitted so far.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated one by one in the range of 1 to 255. The value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the details of the game machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the game machine information notification transmission process of FIG. 30 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG.

First, in step S3401, which is executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, an initial value (a value corresponding to 60.196 seconds in the present embodiment) is set in the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer.

In step S3403, 1 is set for the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

In step S3404, 2 is set for the gaming machine information type, and the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3406, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

In step S3406, an initial value (a value corresponding to 180.588 seconds in the present embodiment) is set in the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer.

In step S3407, 0 is set for the gaming machine information type, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the details of the count notification transmission process (step S305) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the counting notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 25.

First, in step S3501 to be executed first, this process is repeatedly executed until the value of the count notification interval timer becomes 0, and when the value of the timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S3502.

In step S3502, an initial value (a value corresponding to 170 ms in the present embodiment) is set in the loan notification interval timer.

In steps S3503 to S3505, the telegram length, the command type, and the counting serial number are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3506, the value of the number of counts is set to 0.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3508, and if the signal is off, the process proceeds to step S3513. If this VL signal is normal, it is a signal transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in a state of being always on.

In step S3508, if the number of sheets to be counted is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3509, and if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, the process proceeds to step S3513.

In step S3509, the throw-in prohibition flag is set to on.

In step S3510, if the number of planned counts is equal to or greater than the number of game medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3511, and if the number of planned counts is less than the number of game medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3512.

In step S3511, the value of the number of game medals for counting determination is set in the number of countings.

In step S3512, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set in the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S3513, the counting number is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3514, the value of the number of counted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the number of sheets to be counted is set to 0.

In step S3516, the throw-in prohibition flag is set to off.

In step S3517, the value of the number of counted medals is added to the total number of counted medals.

In step S3518, the total number of medals counted is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S3519, a checksum is transmitted to the lending machine 700. The checksum value transmitted here is a value updated based on the data transmitted to the lending machine 700 in this count notification transmission process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated one by one in the range of 1 to 255. The value of the counting serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the details of the loan notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the loan notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 25.

First, in step S3601, which is executed first, if the loan notification receipt flag is off, the process proceeds to step S3602, and if the flag is on, the loan notification reception confirmation process is terminated.

In step S3602, if the value of the lending notification interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3603, and if the same value is not 0, the process returns to step S3601.

In step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3604, and if the signal is off, the loan notification reception confirmation process is terminated. This VL signal is a signal transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in a state of being always on.

In step S3604, the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1, and the lending notification reception confirmation process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the details of the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal number control unit main process of FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 25.

First, in step S3701, which is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the lending machine communication abnormality counter.

In step S3702, the lending machine communication error setting flag is set to off.

In step S3703, if the result of receiving the number of loans is “normal”, the process proceeds to step S3704, and if it is not “normal”, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the lending serial number is set in the normal lending serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the loan serial number is set in the confirmation loan serial number. The confirmation lending serial number is a value used for comparison with the next lending serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 37), and this step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the confirmation loan serial number is updated one by one in the range of 1 to 255. The value of the rental serial number for confirmation is 0 only when the power is turned on.

From step S3707 to step S3711, the telegram length, command type, normal lending serial number, number of loaned sheets received result, checksum) are sequentially transmitted to the lending machine 700. The checksum is a value updated based on the content of the previous transmission.

In step S3712, if the loan receipt result is “normal”, the process proceeds to step S3712, and if it is other than “normal”, the loan receipt result response transmission process is terminated.

In step S3713, the standby process is executed from step S3707 until the transmission of step S3711 is completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals, and the loan receipt result response transmission process is completed.

<< Medal number control unit timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the medal number control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the medal number control unit 350 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process.

The medal number control unit 350 includes a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 0.745 ms in this embodiment), and the medal number control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU to the stack area is performed.

In step S402, the WDT is periodically (in the present embodiment, the medal number control unit timer) so that the WDT count value does not exceed the initial setting value and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected). (Once every 0.745 ms, which is the interrupt cycle), restart.

In step S403, the input port state update process (port reading) is performed. In this input port state update process, the input contents for the I / O input port are stored in the signal state storage area in the RAM 358.

In step S404, the loan notification reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In step S405, the planned counting number update process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

In step S406, the game control unit command reception process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

In step S407, the error monitoring process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

In step S408, the medal number control command transmission process addressed to the game control unit is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

In step S409, the display display process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

In step S410, a timer update process is performed, and a process of updating various timers in each time unit is executed.

In step S411, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is received (when the power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S413, and when the low voltage signal is not received (when the power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S412. move on.

In step S412, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, processing such as setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each original register is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the medal number control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S413, information (return data) that needs to be saved, such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery, is saved in a predetermined area of RAM 358, and the used area of RAM 358 is saved. The checksum value for a predetermined area including at least is derived and stored in the RAM 358, and the power supply status is set to "normal". When the game control unit 302 also detects that the power supply is cut off, the same process (step S214 in FIG. 21) is executed, but the process here is completed before the process on the game control unit 302 side is completed. If this happens, the command from the game control unit 302 cannot be received. In this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted in which the processing here is completed after the processing on the game control unit 302 side is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the details of the loan notification reception process (step S404) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the loan notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 35.

First, in step S4001 executed first, the loan notification receipt flag is set to off.

In step S4002, if the loan notification from the lending machine 700 is received, the process proceeds to step S4003, and if not received, the lending notification receiving process is terminated.

In step S4003, the information in the RAM 358 is updated based on the received loan notification. That is, the data included in the loan notification is stored in the RAM 358.

In step S4004, the loan number determination process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

In step S4005, the determination result of step S4004 is set as the result of receiving the number of loans.

In step S4006, the lending notification receiving flag is set to on, and the lending notification receiving process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the details of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in the loan notification reception process of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the loan number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 36.

First, in step S4101, which is executed first, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the received loan notification data.

In step S4103, the value of the checksum included in the received loan notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102, and if they are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4104. End the process.

In step S4104, the value of the loan serial number included in the received loan notification is compared with the value of the confirmation loan serial number stored in the RAM 358, and if they are equal, the process proceeds to step S4105, and if they are different, this loan is made. The number-of-sheet determination process ends. If the previous loan notification is normally received, the confirmation loan serial number here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 of FIG. 34 (the loan serial number received last time is updated). ..

In step S4105, if the received message length and command type information of the loan notification are information corresponding to the loan notification, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4106. In other cases, the loan number determination process is completed. do.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of loans included in the received loan notification is 0, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4107.

In step S4107, if the value of the number of game medals is less than 15,000, the process proceeds to step S4108, and if the value is 15,000 or more, the loan number determination process is terminated.

In step S4108, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming machine information type of the previously transmitted gaming machine information notification is 2, that is, whether or not the gaming machine information notification is for hall control / fraud monitoring information, and the gaming machine information type is determined. If the value is 2, the process proceeds to step S4109, and if the value is not 2, the loan number determination process ends.

In step S4109, if the value of the number of counts in the previously transmitted count notification is 0, the process proceeds to step S4110, and if the same value is not 0, the process of determining the number of loaned sheets is terminated.

In step S4111, if the value of the number of loans included in the received loan notification is 50 or less, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the same value is greater than 50, the process of determining the number of loans is terminated.

In step S4111, the determination result is set to "normal", and the loan number determination process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the details of the planned counting number update process (step S405) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the planned counting number update process (step S405) in FIG. 35.

First, in step S4201, which is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4202, and if the flag is off, the planned counting number update process is terminated.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S4203, and if the signal is off, the process proceeds to step S4213. If this VL signal is normal, it is a signal transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in a state of being always on.

In step S4203, if the counting button 171 is being operated, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if the button is not being operated, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4205, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the value of the count long press timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4206, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4206, an initial value (a value corresponding to 500 ms in this embodiment) is set as the value of the count long press timer, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the value of the count long press timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4208, and if the value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long press flag is set to on.

In step S4209, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 50, and the process of updating the planned number of sheets to be counted is completed.

In step S4210, if the counting button 171 was operated immediately before (the counting button 171 was released), the process proceeds to step S4211, and in other cases, the planned counting number update process is terminated.

In step S4211, if the count long press flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4212, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted, and the process of updating the planned number of sheets to be counted is completed.

In step S4213, the count long press flag is set to off.

In step S4214, the value of the count long press timer is set to 0.

In step S4215, the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is cleared (set to 0), and the process of updating the planned number of sheets to be counted is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 35.

First, in step S4301 executed first, if the switching of the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 from off to on is detected, the process proceeds to step S4302, and in other cases, this game control unit command reception process is performed. To finish.

In step S4302, an initial value (a value corresponding to 190 ms in the present embodiment) is set in the game control command disconnection timer.

In step S4303, if the received command is a game control state command, the process proceeds to step S4304, and if the received command is not a game control state command (a game control priority command), the process proceeds to step S4305.

In step S4304, the game control state command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

In step S4305, the game control priority command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Next, the details of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 39 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 39.

First, in step S4401 to be executed first, if the received command is a command for transmitting a checksum, the process proceeds to step S4404, and if the command is other than that, the process proceeds to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted from the game control means to the medal number control unit 350, and the last command is a check calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. It is a command to send a thumb. That is, the 1st to 40th commands proceed to step S4402, and the 41st command proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the content of the received command, and the game control state command reception process ends.

In step S4404, the checksum value updated by the contents of the 1st to 40th commands in step S4403 is compared with the checksum value included in the command received from the game control unit 302, and if both are equal, it is considered normal. The determination is made, the process proceeds to step S4405, and if the two are different, the game control state command reception process is terminated.

In step S4405, the value of the checksum updated in step S4403 is cleared.

In step S4406, among the contents of the command reception buffer, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the value of the gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 4A) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquisition chip ID is acquired based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in the RAM 358 and the acquired chip ID acquired in step S4408 match, the process proceeds to step S4410, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4414.

In step S4410, among the contents of the command reception buffer, the value of the gaming machine installation information buffer (the value of the gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 4C) is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4411, the value of the combination monitor information buffer among the contents of the command reception buffer is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4412, among the contents of the command reception buffer, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer is set in the RAM 358. By step S4411 and step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 4B is set in the RAM 358.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, and the game control state command reception process ends.

In step S4414, information (error code E7) indicating "chip ID number mismatch" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process of FIG. 28 is executed, and the game control state command reception process is terminated.

Next, the details of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception process of FIG. 39 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 39.

First, in step S4501 to be executed first, if a triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if the command is other than the triple command, the process proceeds to step S4514 of FIG. 42. As described above, the triple command is a command composed of a group of commands transmitted three times in a row, and in the present embodiment, each of the input command, the settlement command, and the payout command shown in FIG. 11A. Is a triple command. That is, among the game control priority commands, if the above triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if an error generation command excluding these commands, a RAM clear command, and a start lever reception command are received, the step of FIG. 42 is performed. It will proceed to S4514.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4504, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4503. In the present embodiment, the last command of the triple command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. That is, for commands other than the last command, the process proceeds to step S4503, the contents of which are stored in the receive buffer, and when the last command is received, the process proceeds to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "rerequest" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the receive buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 and the checksum value included in the last command of the triple command are compared, and if they are equal, it is determined that they are normal, and the process proceeds to step S4507. If they are different, the game control priority command reception process is terminated.

In step S4507, if the game control command serial number update flag described later is on, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4510.

In step S4508, the serial number value of the triple command stored in the receive buffer is set to the serial number value of the game control command.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to off.

The steps S4507 to S4509 are provided for initializing the command serial number for determination.

In step S4510, if the serial number value of the triple command stored in the receive buffer and the game control command serial number value (the game control command serial number updated in the previous S4511 (command serial number for determination)) are equal, step S4511 If the two are different, the process proceeds to step S4512.

In step S4511, 1 is added to the game control command serial number, and the process proceeds to step S4514 of FIG.

In step S4512, information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" is set as an error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process of FIG. 28 is executed, and the game control priority command reception process is terminated.

In step S4514 of FIG. 42, if the received command is a RAM clear command, the process proceeds to step S4515, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4516.

In step S4515, the RAM clear command reception is executed. In this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

In step S4516, if the received command is an input command, the process proceeds to step S4517, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4518.

In step S4517, the input command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

In step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, the process proceeds to step S4519, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4520.

In step S4519, the settlement command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever reception command, the process proceeds to step S4521, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4522.

In step S4521, the start lever reception command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, the process proceeds to step S4523, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4524.

In step S4523, the payout command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

In step S4523, the error occurrence command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the input command reception process (step S4517) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 41 and 42 will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG. 42.

First, in step S4601, which is executed first, information indicating "rerequest" is set in the response command.

In step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4603, and if the flag is on, the input command reception process ends.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the value of the number of game medals is equal to or greater than the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands), the process proceeds to step S4605. End the reception process.

In step S4605, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the value of the current bet number.

In step S4607, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and the input command reception process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 41 and 42 will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 42.

First, in step S4701 executed first, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the current bet number.

In step S4702, if the value of the current bet number is 0, the process proceeds to step S4703, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is subtracted from the value of the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is added to the value of the number of game medals.

In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and the settlement command reception process is terminated.

In step S4706, information (error code E6) indicating "mismatch in the number of payments" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process of FIG. 28 is executed, and the settlement command reception process is terminated.

Next, the details of the start lever reception command reception process (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 41 and 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the start lever reception command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 42.

First, in step S4801, which is executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to on.

In step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, an initial value (a value equivalent to 4.1 s in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the game interval abnormality timer.

In step S4804, 11H (see FIG. 7A) is set as the type information setting value, and in the following step S4805, the value of the received command (current bet number in the game control unit 302) is set as the count information setting value. NS. Here, the set information is later included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the rental machine 700.

In step S4806, the game information setting process is executed, and the start lever reception command reception process ends. The details of the game information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

In step S4807, information (error code E5) indicating "game interval abnormality" is set as an error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process of FIG. 28 is executed, and the start lever reception command reception process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the details of the game information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever reception command reception process of FIG. 45 and the game information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in FIGS. 45 and 47.

First, in step S4901 executed first, the number of game information is added by 1.

In step S4902, if the number of game information is 1, the process proceeds to step S4903, and if the number of game information is not 1 (2), the process proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4903, the value of the type information set value (value set in step S4804 of FIG. 45 or step S4A14 of FIG. 47) is set as the type information 1.

In step S4904, the value of the count information setting value is set as the count information 1, and the game information setting process is terminated. Here, when the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 45 is set as the type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 47 is set as the type information 1. If is set, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the value of the type information set value (the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 45) is set as the type information 2.

In step S4906, the value of the count information set value (the value set in step S4805 of FIG. 45) is set as the count information 2, and the game information setting process ends.

The type information 2 and the count information 2 are provided to transmit information about both of them in case the game is started quickly after the payout (within the transmission cycle to the lending machine 700). It is a thing. That is, when the payout information (step S4A14 or the like in FIG. 47) is set in the type information 1 and the count information 1, the current bet number information (step S4804 or the like in FIG. 45) is the type information 2 and the count information 2. May be set to. From the start of the game to the payout, the reels rotate and stop, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it is sent to the lending machine 700 (cleared), so the payout information is the type information. 2 and count information 2 are not set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the details of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 41 and 42 will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 42.

First, in step S4A01, which is executed first, the game medal number clear detection information is cleared.

In step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4A03, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the player has won the re-game, the process proceeds to step S4A04, and if the player has not won the re-game, the process proceeds to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, 0 is set in the game medal number addition value.

In step S4A05, information (error code E4) indicating "abnormal payout number" is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is 15 or less, the process proceeds to step S4A07, and if the value is greater than 15, the process proceeds to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the value of the number of medals to be paid out is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands).

In step S4A08, the game medal number addition value is set to the value included in the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands).

In step S4A09, information (error code E2) indicating "game order abnormality" is set as an error request setting value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process of FIG. 28 is executed, and the payout command reception process is terminated.

In step S4A11, the game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

In step S4A12, if the response command information indicates "normal", the process proceeds to step S4A13, and in other cases, the payout command reception process ends.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to off.

In step S4A14, 21H (see FIG. 7A) is set as the type information setting value.

In step S4A15, if the player wins the replay combination, the process proceeds to step S4A18, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value included in the first command among the triple commands) is set as the count information setting value. The first command among the payout commands here includes the number of payouts in the game control unit 302, and this payout number is set in the count information set value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information together with the type information setting value and is transmitted to the rental machine 700.

In step S4A17, the current bet number is set to 0.

In step S4A18, the value of the current bet number is set in the count information set value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information together with the type information setting value and is transmitted to the rental machine 700.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process shown in FIG. 46 is executed, and the payout command reception process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process of FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 47.

First, in step S4B01, which is executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the total value of the number of game medals and the number of game medals added is set in the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the addition result is 16383 or less, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the addition result is larger than 16383, the game medal number overflow confirmation process is terminated.

In step S4B04, the value of the addition result is set in the number of game medals.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and the game medal number overflow confirmation process ends.

Next, the details of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception process of FIGS. 41 and 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 4 is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 42.

First, in step S4C01, which is executed first, the error request is cleared. When an error generation command is received from the game control unit 302, the error on the medal number control unit 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so that the error of the game control unit 302 is processed with priority.

In step S4C02, if the received command is set with information indicating "game control disconnection" (error code E1), the process proceeds to step S4C08, and in other cases, the process proceeds to step S4C03.

In step S4C03, if the received command is set with information (error code E2) indicating "game order abnormality", the process proceeds to step S4C08, and in other cases, the process proceeds to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if the received command is set with information (error code E3) indicating "game control command serial number abnormality", the process proceeds to step S4C08, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if the received command is set with information indicating "medal number control RAM error" (error code E8), the process proceeds to step S4C08, and in other cases, the process proceeds to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if the received command is set with information indicating "medal number control disconnection" (error code E0), the process proceeds to step S4C08, and in other cases, the process proceeds to step S4C07.

In step S4C07, if the received command is set with information (error code rE) indicating "game control RAM failure", the process proceeds to step S4C08, and in other cases, this error occurrence command reception process is terminated.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to on, and the error occurrence command reception process ends. By setting this flag on, the command serial number for determination is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 41).

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 35.

First, in step S4D01, which is executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information (error code E1) indicating "game control disconnection" is set as an error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process of FIG. 28 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D05, and if the value is not 1, the error monitoring process ends.

In step S4D05, if the lending machine communication error error setting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, this error monitoring process ends.

In step S4D06, information (error code E9) indicating "lending machine communication error" is set as an error request setting value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process of FIG. 28 is executed, and this error monitoring process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) addressed to the game control unit in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the medal number control command transmission process (step S408) addressed to the game control unit in FIG. 35.

First, in step S4E01, which is executed first, the VL signal information is updated.

In step S4E02, if the power-on during flag described above is off, the process proceeds to step S4E03, and if the flag is on, the medal number control command transmission process addressed to the game control unit is terminated.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4E04, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, some response command to be transmitted to the game control unit 302 (a response command set by either the input command reception process of FIG. 43, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 44, or the payout command reception process of FIG. 47) is set. If not, the process proceeds to step S4E05, and if any response command is set, the process proceeds to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly added and updated one by one within the range of 1 to 6 (1 after 6). In the present embodiment, the medal number control state command (six types of commands) described with reference to FIG. 9 is repeatedly transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302 in order. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the types of commands to be transmitted.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information to be the target of this command are read out to generate the transmission content, and the transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302. When transmitting information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into upper byte and lower byte and transmitted using two of the six types of commands. The value at this time is two commands. Of these, the value of the number of game medals acquired when the previous command is transmitted is used.

In step S4E07, the response command set in any of the input command reception process of FIG. 43, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 44, and the payout command reception process of FIG. 47 is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302.

In step S4E08, the response command set in any of the input command reception process of FIG. 43, the settlement command reception process of FIG. 44, and the payout command reception process of FIG. 47 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the value of the strobe counter is 3 or less, the process proceeds to step S4E10, and if the value is greater than 3, the process proceeds to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S4E13.

In step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by 1. This value is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 7 (0 after 7).

In step S4E14, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are output to the game control unit 302, and the process of transmitting the medal number control command addressed to the game control unit is completed. The information output here is received on the game control unit 302 side when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the display display process (step S409) in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 3 is a flowchart of the display display process (step S409) in FIG. 35.

First, in step S4F01 executed first, if the value of the number of game medals is different from the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if both have the same value, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4F03, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is larger than the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is smaller than the value of the number of display game medals, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, the value of the number of display game medals is added by 1.

In step S4F05, the value of the number of display game medals is subtracted by 1.

In step S4F06, a value corresponding to 4 ms is set in the value of the discrete timer.

In step S4F07, the number of display game medals is displayed, and this display display process ends.

<< Modification 1 >>
Here, a modified example of the process related to medal insertion (hereinafter, modified example 1) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. 53 is a modification of the medal insertion process of FIG. 15, FIG. 54 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 18, and FIG. 55 is a modification of the insertion command reception process of FIG. 43. be.

First, in the modified example shown in FIG. 53, in the process shown in FIG. 15, step S1121 is provided between step S1107 and step S1108, and step S1122 is provided between step S1109 and step S1110. Further, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 15 have been deleted to provide step S1123. Hereinafter, these processes will be described.

In step S1121, the input number limitation flag is set to on.

In step S1122, the input number limitation flag is set to off.

In step S1123, the value of the response content is added to the value of the current bet number.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 54, step S1402 is deleted from the processes shown in FIG. 18, and step S1421 is provided. This process will be described below.

In step S1421, of the contents (2 bytes) transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, the information of the requested number of sheets and the insertion number limited flag is set in the lower byte.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 55, step S4603 is deleted from the processes shown in FIG. 43. Further, in the determination of step S4604, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 are newly provided ahead of the No route, and further, step S4608 is deleted and step S4624 is provided. Hereinafter, these processes will be described.

In step S4621, the information of the input limited flag included in the received command (the first command among the triple commands) is referred to, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4622, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4622. The process proceeds to step S4623.

In step S4622, the value of the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of sheets included in the received command (the first command among the triple commands) is set to the value of the number of game medals, and the process proceeds to step S4605.

In step S4623, the value of the received command value that stores the value of the requested number of sheets included in the received command (the first command among the triple commands) is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S4624.

In step S4624, the receive command value is set in the response command, and the input command reception process ends.

<< Modification 2 >>
Here, a modified example of the planned counting number update process (hereinafter, modified example 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a modified example of the planned counting number update process of FIG. 38.

First, in the modified example shown in FIG. 56, step S4204 is deleted from the processes shown in FIG. 38. Further, step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is provided, and further, step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is provided. Hereinafter, these processes will be described.

In step S4221, the value of the long press timer is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171.

In step S4222, the number of sheets to be counted is set according to the pressing time of the counting button 171.

<< Modification 3 >>
Here, a modified example of the planned counting number update process (hereinafter, modified example 3) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a modified example of the planned counting number update process of FIG. 38.

First, in the modified example shown in FIG. 57, in the process shown in FIG. 38, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207. Further, in the determination of step S4207, steps S4233 and S4234 are newly provided at the end of the No route, and steps S4235 and S4236 are further provided before step S4210. Further, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. Hereinafter, these processes will be described.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4232, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4232, a value corresponding to 2.0 seconds is set in the value of the automatic counting timer, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic counting timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4234, and if the same value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic counting flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4210, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the value of the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the same value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic counting flag is set to off, and the planned counting number update process ends.

<< Processing of the first sub-control unit 400 >>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. Note that FIG. 58A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 58B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 58 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing the RT update information, which is the information representing the gaming state, respectively.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed. The details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 58 (d).

In step S509, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing the effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S509, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S509. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S509, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S515, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S509. For example, if there is a shutter control command in the effect data read in step S509, the shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S517, an information output process for setting to transmit a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S509, a setting is made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302. In step S521 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S531, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 58A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S533, device data is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S515, and the effect random number value is updated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58 (d), the details of the command process (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main process of FIG. 58 (a) will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the command process (step S507) in FIG. 58 (a).

First, in step S541, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S543, and if not, the command processing ends.

In step S543, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302, is executed.

<< Processing of the second sub-control unit 500 >>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. Note that FIG. 59A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 59B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 59 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 59 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 59 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input / output port initial setting, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S609, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S607, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read out in step S609, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. This image control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 (d). When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S603.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S615 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S617, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 59A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S619, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S611 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S621, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 518 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S623, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S625. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S625, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image superimposition and transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S629, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S631, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S631, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<< Operation explanation >>
Hereinafter, the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described.

[Operation when the power is turned on]
The medal number control unit 350 backs up the contents of the RAM when the power is turned off. Then, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, the normal RAM is cleared and the state is restored to the state when the power is turned off (yes determination in step S3003 in FIG. 26). The initial power is turned on for the first time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, all RAM is cleared (No is determined in step S3003 of FIG. 26). Further, by storing the information indicating "RAM failure" in the RAM failure information, the information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in step S3006 and step S3020 in FIG. 26). , Step S3102 in FIG. 28). Information on this error is transmitted to the game control unit 302 (FIG. 51), and error notification is executed based on this information (step S1002 in FIGS. 23 and 14). The game control unit 302 does not clear the contents of the RAM even if an error is received from the medal number control unit 350. Further, in the medal number control unit 350, by setting the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag to ON, various information is updated (initialized) when the game control unit status command is received (FIG. 26). (Yes) in step S3007 of FIG. 40 and step S4407 of FIG. 40).

In addition, a RAM clear command may be transmitted from the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on (step S101 in FIG. 13). The medal number control unit 350 that has received the RAM clear command adopts a configuration that clears the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control unit 302 (yes determination in step S3016 of FIG. 26). At this time, when the medal number control unit 350 once permits the interrupt process and then receives a command from the game control unit 302, the interrupt process is prohibited and the subsequent processing is performed. Therefore, the RAM clear command is received and the subsequent processing is performed. It is possible to surely execute the processing when it is received (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 26). Further, by setting the power-on flag to off during the interrupt permission, the counting process by the operation of the counting button 171 is not executed (steps S3011, S3015 in FIG. 26).

In addition, the medal number control unit 350 can initialize the game medal number by operating the game medal number clear button 172 when the power is turned on (yes determination in step S3008 of FIG. 26). At this time, information indicating "detection" is set in the game medal number clear detection information, but while this information is set, the information regarding this clear is included in the game machine information notification and the rental machine 700. Is transmitted to (Fig. 30). The game medal number clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the game control unit 302 (step S4A01 in FIG. 47).

[Game control status command transmission (regular transmission from game control unit 302 to medal number control unit 350)]
In the slot machine 100, a game control state command (see FIG. 8) composed of 41 types is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350. Specifically, in the game control command transmission process (steps S207 and 24 in FIG. 21) of the game control unit timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302, the game control state commands are sequentially transmitted to the medal number control unit one by one. It is set in the buffer (yes determination in step S2201 of FIG. 24). However, if the game control priority command is first set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer (No determination in step S2201 of FIG. 24).

After the game control status command and the game control priority command are set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set to ON (step S2208 in FIG. 24). Judgment of Yes). When this strobe signal is set to ON, the medal number control unit 350 side receives a command. The strobe signal is set to off in the next interrupt process, and the contents of the transmission buffer are also cleared (No is determined in step S2208 of FIG. 24), but the output from the I / O port is maintained as it is. .. As a result, the reception of commands on the medal number control unit 350 side can be made more stable. Then, when the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated for new command transmission in the next interrupt process (yes determination in step S2201 of FIG. 24). That is, the game control unit 302 transmits one command while the two interrupt processes are executed, and switches between the transmission state and the transmission stop state each time the interrupt process is executed. The transmission state continues for 1.49 ms (however, the command output itself continues for 2.98 ms), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (0.745 ms interrupt processing is performed twice). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed.

[Transmission of game control priority command (interrupt transmission from game control unit 302 to medal number control unit 350)]
The game control unit 302 transmits a game control status command to the medal number control unit 350 in the timer interrupt process, but the game control priority command gives priority to medals according to the game status in the game control unit main process. It is transmitted to the number control unit 350. More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the game control command transmission process (FIG. 24), the game control command transmission process in the next timer interrupt process is executed (the next game control state command is By setting the game control priority command in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main processing before (set in the transmission buffer), this game control priority command has priority over the game control state command and the medal number control unit. Sent to 350. The game control priority commands include the insertion command associated with the insertion operation of the game medal, the settlement command associated with the settlement operation of the game medal currently set for the number of bets, the start lever reception command associated with the reception of the start lever operation, and the game medal. There are a payout command associated with payout, an error occurrence command associated with an error occurrence, and a RAM clear command associated with RAM clearing (FIG. 11A).

Of the game control priority commands, the input command, the settlement command, and the payout command are each composed of three commands. The first command is a command that includes information on the number of target game medals, the second command is a command that includes the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command is the previous command. It is a command that includes a checksum based on the contents of the two commands. Since these commands are continuously transmitted without being interrupted by other commands, they are sometimes called triple commands. In addition, the value of the high-order byte of the triple command is a continuous value.

If the response command from the medal number control unit 350 has not been received, or if the response command from the medal number control unit 350 contains information indicating "rerequest", the command is retransmitted. (Determination of No in step S1308 of FIG. 17, determination of No in step S1310), when the upper limit of the number of retransmissions is exceeded, information indicating "abnormality" is set as a response result from the medal number control unit 350. (No determination in step S1302 and step S1306).

If the response command from the medal number control unit 350 contains information other than "rerequest", this information is set in the response result from the medal control unit, and the command serial number is added by 1. 17 steps S1311, S1312).

[Operation of game control unit 302 by throwing operation (transmission of throwing command, etc.)]
When the game medal insertion operation is performed, the number of game medals (required number of medals) required by this operation is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 15). In the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a loading operation using two types of bet buttons, a 1-bet button and a MAX bet button. When the MAX bet button is operated, the number of game medals required to set the maximum bet number is set to the required number of medals (step S1107 in FIG. 15), and when the 1-bet button is operated, 1 is set in the requested number of medals. It is set (step S1109 in FIG. 15). However, when the current bet number is the maximum bet number, 0 is set in the requested number by the insertion operation (No is determined in step S1106 of FIG. 15).

Next, a command consisting of high-order byte data indicating that it is a insertion command and low-order byte data indicating the value of the requested number of sheets (the first of the commands constituting the insertion command) is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 15, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 18, 19). When the game control command transmission process (step S207, FIG. 24 of FIG. 21) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is set in the transmission buffer first. The command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No is determined in step S2201 of FIG. 24).

After that, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt process (No is determined in step S2208 of FIG. 24), the check sum is updated, and further, 1 is added to the upper byte data. The command is added and updated to the value indicating the second command, and the command consisting of the lower byte data indicating the command serial number (the second of the commands constituting the input command) is added to the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set (steps S1404 to S1407 of FIG. 18, FIG. 19). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207, FIG. 24 of FIG. 21) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350, and the next game control unit timer interrupt process is performed. Game control command of processing When the transmission buffer is cleared in the transmission processing (determination of No in step S2208 of FIG. 24), the check sum is updated, and 1 is added to the upper byte data to indicate the third command. Along with updating to a value, a command consisting of low-order byte data indicating a check sum (third of the commands constituting the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (step S1408 in FIG. 18). ~ S1411, FIG. 19). Then, in the game control command transmission process (step S207, FIG. 24 of FIG. 21) of the next game control unit timer interrupt process, the command of the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350.

The insertion command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command contains information indicating that it is "normal", the current bet number value includes the requested number of sheets. Is added (yes determination in step S1112 in FIG. 15).

If the re-game combination is won and the re-game is given (the re-game flag is on), the above input command process is not executed (No is determined in step S1104 of FIG. 15).

Further, from the time when the insertion command is transmitted until the response command from the medal number control unit 350 is received, the insertion command is not transmitted even if the bet button is operated (step S1112 in FIG. 15 receives the response command). Wait until you do).

Further, when the bet button is operated, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether or not the response command to the insertion command is received and the content of the response command from the medal number control unit 350. (Step S1114 in FIG. 15). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of game control unit 302 by settlement operation (transmission of settlement command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current bet number is added accordingly, but by operating the settlement button 134 (settlement operation), the game medal set in the current bet number can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the value of the current bet number is set to the number of game medals (requested number of medals) required in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 of FIG. 15, step S1203 of FIG. 16).

Next, a command consisting of high-order byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and low-order byte data indicating the value of the requested number of sheets (the first of the commands constituting the settlement command) is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 16, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 18, 19). When the game control command transmission process (step S207, FIG. 24 of FIG. 21) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is set in the transmission buffer first. The command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No is determined in step S2201 of FIG. 24).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands constituting the settlement command are transmitted, but since this process is the same as the input command, the description thereof will be omitted.

The settlement command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command contains information indicating that it is "normal", the value of the current bet number is set to 0. It is set (determination of Yes in step S1206 of FIG. 16).

If the re-game combination is won and the re-game is granted (the re-game flag is on), the above settlement command process is not executed (No is determined in step S1202 of FIG. 16).

Further, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether or not the settlement command is transmitted and the content of the response command from the medal number control unit 350 ( Step S1201) of FIG. Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the settlement button 134.

[Operation of game control unit 302 by operating the start lever (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
When the start lever is operated while the current bet number value is equal to or greater than the startable number, the upper byte data indicating that the start lever reception command is used and the lower byte data indicating the current bet number value are displayed. A command consisting of (start lever reception command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal number control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 14). Further, a start lever reception command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 14). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of game control unit 302 by payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game is completed and a winning combination is won, the value of the number of payouts is set to the number of game medals (requested number) required for payout (step S1602 in FIG. 20). Next, a command consisting of high-order byte data indicating that it is a payout command and low-order byte data indicating the value of the requested number of sheets (the first of the commands constituting the payout command) is addressed to the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer (steps S1604 and S1605 of FIG. 20, steps S1402 and S1403 of FIG. 18, 19). When the game control command transmission process (step S207, FIG. 24 of FIG. 21) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed in this state, the game control state command is not set in the transmission buffer, but is set in the transmission buffer first. The command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (No is determined in step S2201 of FIG. 24).

Subsequently, the second and third commands among the commands constituting the payout command are transmitted, but since this process is the same as the input command, the description thereof will be omitted.

The payout command is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 in the above flow, but if the response command to this command contains information indicating that it is "normal", the first sub-control unit 400 is notified. The command is transmitted (step S1607 of FIG. 20). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute an effect corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals overflows and the payout cannot be accepted, so the command indicating this state is the first. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 20). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 can execute the corresponding effect at the time of overflow. If the overflow state is not resolved, the payout command is repeatedly retransmitted, and the game cannot proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be eliminated by operating the counting button 170. When the overflow state is resolved, the effect corresponding to the payout is executed, and the game can proceed. That is, if the game cannot proceed due to the overflow, the player can deal with it without calling a clerk.

[Operation when receiving a medal number control command]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S2101 in FIG. 23), the type of this command (game control state command (FIG. 9) or response command (FIG. 11). (B)) is identified, and the contents of the RAM 308 are updated according to the type of the command (step S2102 in FIG. 23). The response commands for the input command, the settlement command, and the payout command are updated here. If the command received here is a command including an error code, this error code is an error of the game control unit 302, provided that the error status of the game control unit 302 is not set. It is set to the status (step S2104 in FIG. 23).

[Sending a medal number control command (from medal number control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, a medal number control state command (see FIG. 9) composed of six types is transmitted to the game control unit 302. Specifically, one medal number control state command is generated by the medal number control command transmission process (step S408 in FIG. 35, FIG. 51) addressed to the game control unit in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process of the medal number control unit 350. It is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit one by one (yes determination in step S4E04 in FIG. 51). However, if the response command is first set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302, the medal number control status command is not set in the transmission buffer (No is determined in step S4E04 in FIG. 51).

The medal number control status command and the response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are then output to the game control unit 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 51). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to ON (step S4E10 in FIG. 51), the game control unit 302 will receive a command. In managing the on / off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter that adds 1 for each interrupt in the range of 0 to 7 is used, and the strobe counter is set to on between 0 and 3. Between 4 and 7 is set to off (step S4E09, step S4E13 in FIG. 51). The transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 51). That is, in the medal number control unit 350, one command is transmitted while the interrupt processing is executed eight times, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every time the interrupt processing is performed four times. .. The transmission state continues for 2.98 ms (0.745 ms x 4 times), whereas the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (1.49 ms interrupt processing is performed twice). It is possible to prevent dropping.

[Operation when receiving a game control status command]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 39), if this command is a game control state command, the game control state command reception process (FIG. 39). Step S4304, FIG. 40).

For the game control state command, 41 types of commands (FIG. 8) are sequentially transmitted, and among them, the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in the buffer and the checksum is updated (No. in step S4401 of FIG. 40). Judgment). Then, when the 41st command (checksum) is received, if this content is normal, the checksum is cleared and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4406 in FIG. 40). S441-10 to S4413). However, the update of the gaming machine installation information buffer, the combination monitor information buffer, and the gaming machine performance information buffer is executed when the chip ID stored in the RAM and the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer match. (Yes in step S4409 of FIG. 40). If the IDs do not match, the error code E7 is set as an error request (No is determined in step S4409 in FIG. 40). Further, when all the RAMs are cleared in the medal number control unit 350, the chip ID stored in the RAM has been cleared. Therefore, in this case, the above chip ID check is not executed as an exception. The update process is executed (in FIG. 26, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is turned on, and in step S4407 in FIG. 40, No is determined).

[Operation when receiving a game control priority command]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching the strobe signal, step S4301 in FIG. 39), if this command is a game control priority command, the game control priority command reception process (FIG. 39). Step S4305, FIG. 41, FIG. 42).

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever reception command, error occurrence command), processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 42).

On the other hand, when the game control priority command is a triple command (input command, settlement command, payout command), the first and second commands are temporarily stored in the buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 41), and the third command is stored. If, the checksum value included in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents stored in the buffer earlier, and if it is abnormal, information indicating "rerequest" is sent as a response command. (Steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 41).

Next, if the game control command serial number update flag is on, the game control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the receive buffer, and the game control command serial number update flag is set to off (FIG. 41). Judgment of Yes in step S4507). The game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set to be turned on in order to prevent a situation in which a command serial number error occurs separately after the error is resolved (FIG. 49).

Next, it is determined whether or not the game control command serial number and the command serial number stored in the reception buffer match (step S4510 in FIG. 41). Since the game control unit 302 and the medal number control unit 350 both add 1 to the command serial number (step S1312 in FIG. 17 and step S4511 in FIG. 41), these values match if there is no abnormality. If these values do not match, the error code E3 is set in the error request (No is determined in step S4510 of FIG. 41).

After the above processing, the processing corresponding to each command is executed (FIG. 42).

[Operation when input command is received]
If the received game control priority command is an input command, the input command reception process is executed (steps S4517 and 43 in FIG. 42). In this process, if the value included in the insertion command (hereinafter referred to as the number of insertion requests) is within the number of game medals, the number of insertion requests is added to the number of insertion medals, and the number of insertion requests is added to the current number of bets. After the required number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of game medals, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (yes determination in step S4604 of FIG. 43). When the required number of inserted medals is larger than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in steps S4603 and S4604 of FIG. 43). The value of the number of inserted medals is a value used for the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 30).

While the count notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set to on (step S3509 in FIG. 32), and when this flag is on, the response command contains information indicating "re-request". It is set (No is determined in steps S4601 and S4602 of FIG. 43).

[Operation when receiving a settlement command]
If the received game control priority command is a settlement command, the settlement command reception process is executed (steps S4519 and 44 in FIG. 42). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter, the number of settlement requests) is subtracted from the current bet number (step S4701 in FIG. 44). Then, if the value of the number of bets is currently 0, the number of payment requests is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, the number of payment requests is added to the number of game medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command. (Yes determination in step S4702 of FIG. 44). The value of the number of inserted medals is a value used for the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 30). If the current bet number is not 0, the error code E6 is set as an error request (No is determined in step S4702 of FIG. 44).

[Operation when receiving start lever reception command]
When the received game control priority command is the start lever reception command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 45). If this flag is not set to on, an error may occur in the subsequent issue command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (yes is determined in step S4802 of FIG. 45), the initial value is set in the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 of FIG. 45), and further, the game information is set. Processing is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 45). Here, 11H is set as the type information setting value, and this value is a value indicating the reception of the start lever. In addition, the current bet number is set in the count information set value. That is, in these processes, the information on the number of game medals used by the reception of the start lever is stored as the game information. The game information is information used for the game machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of this information is initialized every time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 30). If the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, the error code E5 is set as an error request (No is determined in step S4802 of FIG. 45). This game interval abnormality timer is the same timer as the game interval counter (step S106 in FIG. 13) in the game control unit 302, but by using this timer in the medal number control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302, Prevents fraud.

[Operation when payout command is received]
If the received game control priority command is a payout command, the game medal number clear detection information is first cleared. This information is set by operating the game medal number clear button 172 when the power is turned on, but this information is transmitted to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared when the payout command is received. ing.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not on, the error code E2 is set as an error request (No is determined in step S4A02 of FIG. 47). Since this flag is a flag that is set to be on when the start lever reception command is received, if this flag is off, it means that the payout command is being received even though the start lever reception command has not been received. Used for fraud prevention.

Next, if the player has won the re-game, 0 is set in the game medal number addition value (step S4A04 in FIG. 47). In cases other than re-game winning, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) is 15 or less, the value of the number of payouts is set in the number of payout medals and the value of the number of game medals added (FIG. 47). Steps S4A07, S4A08). The value of the number of medals to be paid out is a value used for the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3309 in FIG. 30). If the number of payouts is larger than 15, the error code E4 is set as an error request (No is determined in steps S4A05 and S4A06 in FIG. 47).

Subsequently, the game medal number overflow confirmation process is executed (steps S4A11 and 48 in FIG. 47). Here, if the total value of the number of game medals and the added value of the number of game medals is 16383 or less, which is the upper limit of the number of game medals for payout, this total value is set as the number of game medals, and "normal" is indicated in the response command. The information is set (yes determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 48). On the other hand, when the total value is larger than the upper limit of the number of game medals, the number of game medals is maintained as it is, and information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command (No determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 48). Regarding the determination of the number of game medals here, as will be described later (see [Lending notification (regular transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]), the number of game medals is the actual threshold value in the actual operation. If it exceeds, it cannot be increased by payout (response command "abnormal"), and if it does not exceed the actual threshold value, it can be increased by payout (response command "normal"). Any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in the present embodiment), and for example, the actual threshold value does not have to be the same as the determination value in the process.

If information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command in the game medal overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process ends and this response command is transmitted to the game control unit 302.

On the other hand, if the response command is set with information indicating "normal", the payout command acquisition flag is set to off (step S4A13 in FIG. 47). Further, a process of setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 47). Here, 21H is set as the type information setting value, and this value is a value indicating that the payment has been made. In addition, the number of payouts (current bet number in the case of re-game winning) is set in the count information set value. That is, in these processes, the information on the number of game medals obtained by the payout is stored as the game information. The game information is information used for the game machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of this information is initialized every time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 30).

[Notification of gaming machine information (regular transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, the game machine information notification is transmitted in the medal number control unit main process (step S304 in FIG. 25, FIG. 30). The gaming machine information notification is configured to be executed at intervals of about 300 ms by the gaming machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 30). Further, 90 ms is set in the counting notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the counting notification executed after the transmission of the gaming machine information notification (step S3303 in FIG. 30).

Next, the value of the current number of game medals is set in the number of game medals for counting determination. In the slot machine 100, the number of game medals may change when the counting process (movement of the number of game medals from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700) is performed. Therefore, the value for the counting process is temporarily set. Is set to the number of game medals for counting determination (step S3304 in FIG. 30).

Next, the gaming machine information type is acquired (step S3305 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and one of three types of gaming machine information is selected: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control / fraud monitoring information (FIG. 6). (B)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, the gaming machine performance information is selected, when it is 1, the gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, the hall computer / fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, one of 0, 1, and 2 is set as the game machine information type by using the game machine installation information transmission interval timer and the game machine performance information transmission interval timer (FIG. 31). In the present embodiment, 1 is set for the gaming machine information type at intervals of about 60 seconds, 0 is set for the gaming machine information type at intervals of about 180 seconds, and 2 is set for the gaming machine information type in other cases. .. That is, in the game machine information notification having a cycle of about 300 ms, the hall control / fraud monitoring information is mainly included in the game machine information, but the game machine installation information is included in the game machine information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and about 180 seconds. The gaming machine performance information will be included in the gaming machine information at intervals. The data (FIGS. 6A and 6B) to be notified of the gaming machine information, including the gaming machine information corresponding to the gaming machine information type, is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the lending machine (step S3306 in FIG. 30). ), Sequentially transmitted (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 30). At the time of this transmission, the gaming machine information serial number is updated (step S3318 in FIG. 30).

The hall control / fraud monitoring information corresponding to the case where the game machine information type is 2 includes game information according to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid medals, and the number of game information, and these information are transmitted to the lending machine. After being set in the buffer, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (yes determination in step S3307 of FIG. 30).

[Counting notification (regular transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, a count notification is transmitted in the main process of the medal number control unit (step S305 in FIG. 25, FIG. 32). The count notification transmission process is configured to be executed 90 ms or later from the start of the game machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 30 and step S3501 in FIG. 32).

In the counting notification transmission process, the data to be counted notification (FIGS. 6A and 6C) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the lending machine and sequentially transmitted (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, S3518 in FIG. 32). , S3519). At the time of this transmission, the counting serial number is updated (step S3520 in FIG. 32).

This counting notification includes information on the number of sheets to be counted, but when the number of sheets to be counted is 0, 0 is transmitted as the number of sheets to be counted (No determination in step S3508 of FIG. 32, step S3513). In this case, the number of game medals does not change (step S3514 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the planned counting number is set to a value other than 0, the counting number is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 in FIG. 32), and the number of game medals is further subtracted (FIG. 32). Step S3514). The number of counting medals and the subtraction of the number of game medals are executed in a state where the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 in FIG. 32). The number of medals to be counted is set in the process of updating the number of medals scheduled to be counted in the timer interrupt process of the medal number control unit (steps S405 and 38 in FIG. 35).

[Setting the number of medals to be counted (medal number control unit 350)]
The medal number control unit 350 executes the planned counting number update process in the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (steps S405 and 38 in FIG. 35). The number of sheets to be counted is determined based on the number of sheets to be counted set in this process, and a counting notification including this information is transmitted to the lending machine 700.

First, a case where the count button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms will be described. In this case, the initial value is set in the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 38), but the count button 171 is released before the value of the timer reaches 1 (500 ms elapses after pressing), so that the count is counted. The long press flag is not set to on (Yes is not determined in step S4207 of FIG. 38). When the counting button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the number of sheets to be counted (Yes determination in step S4210 in FIG. 38, step S4212).

Next, a case where the count button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more will be described. In this case, when the initial value is set in the count long press timer (step S4206 in FIG. 38) and the value of the timer becomes 1 (500 ms elapses after pressing), the count long press flag is set to ON and the count is counted. The planned number of sheets is set to 50 (yes determination in step S4207 of FIG. 38). After that, while the count button 171 is held down while the count long press flag is on, the process of setting the planned count number to 50 is repeated, and each time the count notification is transmitted, the count number is counted based on this scheduled count number. Will be set. On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is released while the counting long press flag is on, the counting long press flag is set to off, the counting long press timer is set to 0, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is cleared (step S4210 in FIG. 38). Judgment of Yes, determination of No in step S4211).

[Lending notification (regular transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]
When the medal number control unit 350 receives the loan notification from the lending machine 700, the content of the RAM is updated based on the content of the lending notification (step S4003 in FIG. 36). Then, it is determined that the checksum calculated from the loan notification and the checksum included in the loan notification match (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 37). Next, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lending serial number of the medal number control unit 350 and the lending serial number included in the lending notification match (step S4104 in FIG. 37). The confirmation lending serial number holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the lending serial number included in the previously received loan notification (step S3706 in FIG. 34), and is configured to match if communication is normal. Has been done. Furthermore, it is determined whether the telegram length and command data are normal. When an abnormality is determined by these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above determination, if the number of loans included in the loan notification is 0, the determination result is set to "normal" (yes determination in step S4106 of FIG. 37). On the other hand, if the number of loaned sheets is not 0, the following determination is further executed (determination of No in step S4106 of FIG. 37).

First, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4107 of FIG. 37). In the present embodiment, when the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, the number cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14999, it cannot be increased by lending, and if it does not exceed 14999 (if it is 14999 or less), it can be increased by lending. In order to realize this operation, for example, even if a process such as limiting the increase by lending in the case of 15,000 or more and allowing the increase by lending in the case of 14999 or less is adopted, the present embodiment is used. It works the same. Further, in the case of 14999 or less, the increase by lending is possible, and in other cases, even if the increase by lending is restricted, the operation is the same as that of the present embodiment. As described above, in the actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value (14999 in the above case), it cannot be increased by lending, and if it does not exceed the actual threshold value, it can be increased by lending. , A value that becomes an actual threshold value may exist, and any process may be used for the determination process and the determination value (15000 in the present embodiment). For example, the actual threshold value needs to be the same as the determination value in processing. No.

Further, the above determination may be made based on the number of game medals when added, instead of the current number of game medals. However, it can be said that this configuration has a value that becomes an actual threshold value including the number of game medals to be added with respect to the current number of game medals. That is, it can be said that this configuration is also a configuration in which the number of game medals cannot be increased by lending if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold value, and can be increased by lending if the number of game medals does not exceed the actual threshold value.

Next, if the gaming machine information type is not 2, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (No determination in step S4108 of FIG. 37). In the present embodiment, the loan is accepted when the gaming machine information type is set to 2.

Next, if the number of counted sheets is not 0, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4109 of FIG. 37). If the number of counting medals is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the number of rented medals is not 0, the number of game medals is added. Therefore, in this embodiment, these processes are not mixed.

Finally, if the number of loaned sheets is larger than 50, the determination result is set to "abnormal" (determination of No in step S4110 of FIG. 37). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of loans per loan is set to 50.

If no abnormality is found in the above determination, the determination result is set to "normal" (yes determination in steps S4107 to S4110 in FIG. 37).

The determination result of the above processing is set in the loan number receipt result, and the loan notification receipt flag is set to on (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 36).

In addition to the above-mentioned loan notification reception process, the medal number control unit 350 executes a loan notification reception confirmation process in the medal number control unit main process (steps S306 and 33 in FIG. 25). In this loan notification reception confirmation process, it is confirmed whether the loan notification receipt flag is turned on for 170 ms from the start of the count notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 32, step S3601 in FIG. 33, step S3602). .. This lending notification receiving flag is set in the lending notification receiving process of the medal number control unit timer interrupt process (step S404, FIG. 36 of FIG. 35).

If the lending notification receipt flag is not turned on by 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission processing even though the VL signal is on, the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is decremented by 1. Step S3604 in FIG. 33). The value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter is initialized when the lending machine receipt result response transmission is executed (step S3701 in FIG. 34), but an error occurs when the value of the lending machine communication abnormality counter becomes 1 (FIG. FIG. 50 steps S4D06, S4D07).

[Lending receipt result response (regular transmission from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal number control unit 350, if the loan notification receipt flag is set to on after the loan notification reception confirmation process, the medal number control unit main process executes the loan receipt result response transmission process (step of FIG. 25). S308, FIG. 34).

In this lending receipt result response transmission process, the parameters related to the lending machine communication abnormality are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in FIG. 34).

Subsequently, if the result of receiving the number of loans is set to "normal", the value of the loan serial number included in the received loan notification is set to the normal loan serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 34). Further, after the value of the loan serial number included in the received loan notification is set to the confirmation loan serial number, the value of the confirmation loan serial number is added by 1 (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 34). That is, the value of the loan serial number for confirmation here is the same value as the value of the loan serial number scheduled to be included in the next loan notification.

Further, subsequently, the data to be the target of the loan receipt result response (FIGS. (a) and (e)) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the lender and sequentially transmitted (steps S3707 to S37011 in FIG. 34). By the above processing, if the result of receiving the number of loans is "normal", the loan serial number received this time will be transmitted, and if the result of receiving the number of loans is "abnormal", the previously received loan serial number will be transmitted. .. If the result of receiving the number of rented medals is "normal", the value of the number of rented medals is added to the number of game medals after the completion of this transmission (yes determination in step S3712 of FIG. 34).

[Operation for error (game control unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 determines various errors (step S203 in FIG. 21). For example, if the strobe signal at the time of command transmission from the medal number control unit 350 is not detected for a certain period of time, a medal number control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 22). When the error status is not set in the game control unit 302, the error status is set based on the error code of the medal number control unit 350. If an error status is set, a process for notifying that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 14 and step S1603 in FIG. 20). Therefore, the error on the game control unit 302 side is processed with priority over the error on the medal number control unit 350 side. For example, if there is no error on the game control unit 302 side, the error on the medal number control unit 350 side is notified. Will be done. Further, the error status is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 by the error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 21).

[Operation for error (medal number control unit 350)]
When the medal number control unit 350 determines that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 26, step S4414 in FIG. 40, step S4512 in FIG. 41, step S4706 in FIG. 44, and FIG. 45. Step S4807, step S4A05 of FIG. 47, step S4A09 of FIG. 47, step S4D02 of FIG. 50, step S4D06 of FIG. 50, FIG. 28). The information of this error code is transmitted to the game control unit 302 by the medal number control state command. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 49). As a result, the error on the game control unit 302 side is processed with priority over the error on the medal number control unit 350 side.

[Modification example for loading operation]
FIG. 53 is a modification of the medal insertion process of FIG. 15, FIG. 54 is a modification of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 18, and FIG. 55 is a modification of the insertion command reception process of FIG. 43. be. The operation of these processes will be described below.

In the medal insertion process of FIG. 15, the required number of bets is determined according to the operated bet buttons 130 and 132 and the current bet number, and the insertion command including this information is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350. (Fig. 18). On the other hand, in FIG. 53, when the MAX bet button (bet button 132) is operated, the input number limiting flag is set to on (step S1121 in FIG. 53), and the single bet button (bet button 130) is operated. If this is the case, the input limit flag is set to off (step S1122 in FIG. 53). Then, an insertion command including the information of the insertion number limited flag is transmitted to the medal number control unit 350 (FIG. 54).

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 55, if the number of game medals exceeds the required number, the requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet number, the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is calculated. It is returned to the game control unit 302 by the response command (yes determination in step S4604 of FIG. 55). The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 53).

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 55, when the number of game medals is less than the required number, the insertion number limitation flag is referred to (No is determined in step S4604 of FIG. 55). When the input number limitation flag is on, 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command without processing the requested number of sheets (No determination in step S4621 of FIG. 55). Since the game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds 0, which is the value returned by this response command, to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 53), the current bet number is maintained unchanged. It will be.

In the insertion command reception process of FIG. 55, when the number of game medals is less than the required number and the insertion number limitation flag is off, the operation is the same as when the current number of game medals is set to the required number (FIG. 55). The determination of Yes is set in step S4621, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current number of bets, and the number of game medals is subtracted to become 0. Then, the value of the number of game medals before subtraction (the value set in the reception command) is returned to the game control unit 302 by the response command. The game control unit 302 that has received this response command adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 53).

In the above modification, when the number of game medals corresponding to the number of medals requested by the insertion command is not sufficient, 0 is returned for the requested number of medals when the insertion number limitation flag is on, and the insertion number limitation flag is off. Returns the maximum number currently available for the requested number of sheets. In this configuration, when the number of medals control unit 350 cannot correspond to the number of medals requested from the game control unit 302, the operation of not responding and the operation of responding as much as possible are used properly, and the information for this proper use (number of inputs). (Limited flag) is transmitted together with the requested number of medals. In this configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the advantage changes depending on the difference in the current bet number, it may be possible to prevent the current bet number value from becoming an unfavorable value unintentionally.

In the present embodiment, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated, a value required for setting the maximum bet number is set as the required number of sheets. For example, the maximum bet number and other values are set. A fixed value such as the above may be set as the required number of sheets.

Further, for example, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the maximum number of bets is set as the required number of bets, if the one bet button 130 is operated first and the number of bets is currently 1, the MAX bet button 132 When a insertion command with the maximum number of bets as the required number is transmitted by the operation, the required number of medals cannot be accepted by the medal number control unit 350 (the maximum number of bets is exceeded). In this case as well, the number of medals control unit 350 cannot correspond to the number of medals requested from the game control unit 302. Even in such a case, by transmitting the information for proper use and the requested number of sheets together, the operation of not responding to the requested number of sheets (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and the operation of responding as much as possible (for example). For example, the maximum bet number can be returned as a response command).

<< Operation example >>
Hereinafter, an example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will be described.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a first example in which the counting button 171 is operated. FIG. 60A is a timing chart of the first example, and FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 60 (a), time elapses from left to right. The same applies to the timing charts shown in the following figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 60 (a), arrows with reference numerals corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 60 (b) are written. These arrows represent the display period of the game medal number display device 170.

Further, at the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 60A, the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is described as “counting timing”. This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The counting number (the number of game values transmitted to the lending machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Further, under the "counting number", the value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further, below that, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In the first example shown in FIG. 60, the operation of the counting button 171 is started with the "number of game medals" being 250. As shown in (i) of FIG. 60 (b), the number "250" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Even if the first counting timing arrives after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, the counting button 171 remains operated. Eventually, 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have elapsed since the operation of the count button 171 was started. Even when 0.5 seconds have passed, the counting button 171 is still operated, and a long press operation is performed, and 50 sheets are set as the value of the planned counting number (step S4209 of the scheduled counting number update process shown in FIG. 38). ). In the following description, operating the count button 171 for 0.5 seconds or longer is referred to as a long press, and an operation of less than 0.5 seconds after the start of the operation of the count button 171 is referred to as a short press. The planned counting number update process shown in FIG. 38 is executed in a 0.7 ms cycle, and while the counting button 171 continues to be operated for more than 0.5 seconds, the value of the scheduled counting number is in a 0.7 ms cycle. It keeps overwriting the value of 50 sheets. After 0.5 seconds have passed since the operation of the counting button 171 was started, when the first counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, the counting number is set based on the value of the planned counting number. (50 in this example), the medal number control unit 350 sends a counting notification of 50 medals to the lending machine 700. The "number of game medals" will be reduced by 50 to 200. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 60 (b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "250" is subtracted by "1". In this change display, a number obtained by subtracting "1" at intervals of about 4 ms is displayed by the display processing shown in FIG. 52. If the display on the game medal number display device 170 is suddenly changed from "250" to "200", the player may not notice the change in the display, and here, a change expressing how the numerical value changes. The display (display performed before displaying the number of game medals after reducing 50 medals, and recognizing that the number of game medals changes) is performed. Then, after about 200 ms has elapsed, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 60 (b), the number "200" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

When the next counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, the counting number is set again based on the value of the planned counting number (50 in this example), and the medal number control unit 350 gives the lending machine 700 50. The counting notification is sent again. The "number of game medals" will be reduced by 50 to 150. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 60 (b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "200" is subtracted by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms. Then, after about 200 ms has elapsed, as shown in (v) of FIG. 60 (b), the number "150" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Further, when the third counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, 50 counting notifications are sent from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700, and the "game medal number" is 50. It will be reduced to 100 sheets. After that, it is assumed that the hand is released from the counting button 171 before the fourth counting timing arrives. That is, the long press operation of the counting button 171 ends. In this case, since the value of the number of sheets to be counted (50 sheets in this case) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 38, even if the fourth counting timing arrives, the counting notification of 50 sheets is not transmitted and "counting". The value of "number of sheets" is 0. Therefore, the "number of game medals" remains at 100. Since the change display is performed in a time shorter than the counting timing of 300 ms (about 200 ms), the player wants to keep the number of game medals after visually recognizing the number after the number of 50 medals has decreased. By ending the operation of the counting button 171, the number of game medals can be left.

Further, when the counting button 171 is released before the first counting timing arrives after the operation of the counting button 171 is started (when the hand is released at the timing of the arrow A shown in FIG. 60A). Is added to the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 38), and when the counting timing arrives, the one sheet is transmitted as a counting notification. The "number of game medals" is reduced by one to 249, and the number "249" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Further, when the counting button 171 is operated a plurality of times after the first operation of the counting button 171 is started and before the first counting timing arrives, that is, a short press is performed a plurality of times before the counting timing arrives. In that case, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is added by 1 each time a short press is performed. Eventually, when the counting timing arrives, the counting number is set based on the value of the planned counting number (corresponding to the number of single presses in this case), and the value of the number of short press operations up to that point is transmitted as a counting notification.

On the other hand, when 0.5 seconds have passed since the operation of the counting button 171 was started and the counting button 171 was released before the first counting timing came (the arrow B shown in FIG. 60A). When the hand is released at the timing), even if the value of the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 sheets, it is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. The value of "count" will be 0 (a count notification with 0 count will be sent). Similarly, after the display of the game medal number display device 170 has changed from 250 to 200 over about 200 ms, the hand is released from the counting button 171 before the next counting timing arrives (FIG. 60A). Even when the hand is released at the timing of the arrow C shown in (), the counting notification of 50 sheets is not transmitted, and the value of "counting" becomes 0 (the counting notification of 0 counting number is transmitted). NS).

FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing a first example of the effect when counting is performed.

FIG. 61 shows an effect image display device 157 and a speaker 272. As described above, the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a cycle of 100 ms includes information indicating the number of counts.

When the counting button 171 is briefly pressed to count one sheet, the effect image display device 157 does not display a display notifying that counting is being performed, for example, if a game background display is displayed. , The display continues. Further, the counting sound is not output from the speaker 272. For example, if the effect sound corresponding to the game background display is output, the output is continued. If a small number of counting sounds are output, they may be mixed with other production sounds, giving the player a feeling of expectation different from the expectation that the other production sounds wanted to express. In the first example, no counting sound is output. If the number of counting sounds is large, there is little possibility that they will be mixed with other production sounds due to a long output time, and the influence on other production sounds is small. Even when two sheets are counted as a small number, the counting sound may not be output as in the case of one sheet.

On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is pressed and held for 50 sheets, a display notifying that counting is being performed is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a counting sound is output from the speaker 272. .. That is, as described above, the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at a cycle of 100 ms includes information indicating the number of counts. When the information representing 50 sheets is transmitted as the information representing the number of sheets to be counted, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a counting sound. Further, when the information representing 50 sheets is transmitted as the information indicating the number of sheets to be counted, the second sub-control unit 500 also displays the notification during counting via the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, during continuous counting in which 50 sheets are counted every 0.3 seconds while the long press is continued, the character display "Continuous counting in progress" is displayed on the effect image display device 157 as shown in FIG. Will be done. This character display is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a counting sound having a length of 0.3 seconds or more (for example, a notification sound of "piyopiyo ..."). Since the length of the counting sound output at one time is 0.3 seconds or more, it is connected to the counting sound output at the next 50 counting timings, and it sounds like continuous output. For example, if the counting sound has a length of 0.5 seconds or more, it wraps with the counting sound output at the next 50 counting timings, and the counting sound is more continuous and the counting sound is generated in the continuous counting period. Continue without interruption. It is recognized that continuous counting is performed by the character display "during continuous counting" and the continuous counting sound.

When the number of counting sheets exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 10 sheets) of 2 or more and less than 50, the counting sound may be output. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during long press may be output. By doing so, for example, when a short press is repeated, it is possible to recognize that a plurality of sheets have been counted. Alternatively, if the remaining "number of game medals" stored in the medal number control unit 350 is less than 50 (for example, 10 remaining) and the player presses and holds the button, 10 medals are counted instead of 50. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that there is little remaining from the change in the production sound.

FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation is performed before the counting button 171 is operated and the number of bets is not 0. In the present embodiment, the value of the current bet number does not change even if the counting button 171 is operated, but in FIG. 62, if the current betting number is not 0 when the counting button 171 is operated, the counting process is executed. This is a modified example in which the settlement process (currently the number of bets is set to 0 and the decrease is added to the number of game medals) is performed before.

In the example shown in FIG. 62, if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated and the count button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, the settlement (the number of bets is returned to the "game medal number") is performed. Be told.

FIG. 62 shows the “current bet number”, and below that, the value of the “game medal number” stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further, below that, the value of the number of counting sheets is shown, and at the bottom, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the "current bet number" is three. The "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 has been reduced from 68 to 65 by subtracting 3 in response to this betting operation. Eventually, the count button 171 is operated instead of the start lever 135. When the counting button 171 is operated, the up edge of the signal indicating the on / off state of the counting button 171 is detected, and based on this up edge detection, the number of bets is first returned to the "game medal number". .. As a result, the "current bet number" becomes 0, and the "game medal number" increases by 3 to 68. That is, the state before the bet operation is returned, and the previous bet operation is canceled. After this cancellation is performed, the counting process is performed. The counting button 171 is long-pressed, and when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is held down, 50 medals are counted, and the "game medal number" is reduced by 50 to 18 medals.

In this example, the current bet number can be returned to the "game medal number" by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1, but the number of game medals is further changed by the counting process. Will be done. If you want to change only the current bet number in this configuration, you can operate the checkout button 134. For example, if you want to change to a 1-card bet after betting 3 cards, operate the checkout button 134 to once return the 3 bets to the "game medal number", and then bet again for a 1-card bet. By operating the button 130, the current number of bets can be reduced to one. Since the settlement process can be performed by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134, the settlement button 134 may not be provided.

FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end effect.

As described above, the game control unit 302 transmits information indicating the number of counts included in the security command to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the number of sheets to be transmitted included in the security command until the number of sheets to be transmitted becomes 0, and when the number of sheets to be transmitted reaches 0 (when the counting is completed). Executes the counting end effect with. The counting end effect here is an effect according to the quantity of counting performed at one time.

FIG. 63A is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counting number is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1000). During counting, the effect image display device 157 performs a counting effect (for example, the character display “continuous counting” and the output of the counting sound described with reference to FIG. 61), and the counting ends. Then, the counting end effect 1 in which the character display of "counting end" is displayed on the effect image display device 157 is performed.

On the other hand, FIG. 63B is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect performed when the cumulative counting number is a predetermined number (for example, 1000) or more. When the counting of the predetermined number of sheets or more is completed, the counting end effect 2 is performed, and the effect image display device 157 is provided with a warning display of "Be careful not to accumulate too much" in addition to the character display of "counting end".

As described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 16383 "game medals" can be stored in the RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350. However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "number of game medals" will disappear. Therefore, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not keep storing too many "game medals". Therefore, it is preferable to perform notification to increase the operation frequency of the counting button 171. The alert display described with reference to FIG. 63B is an example of notification for increasing the operation frequency of the counting button 171 and prompts the lending machine 700 to appropriately move the game value. The effect during counting may also be changed according to the cumulative number of counting sheets. For example, if the cumulative counting number is less than the predetermined number (for example, 1000), the counting effect A is performed, and after the cumulative counting number becomes the predetermined number (for example, 1000) or more, counting is in progress. It is assumed that the production B is performed. Further, the counting effect A is an effect that gives an impression of being in an appropriate state, and the counting effect B is an effect that gives an impression of being in an inappropriate state. It can give the player an unfavorable impression that the cumulative number of counts is large.

Here, the operation in the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated will be described.

FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing an example when the settlement button 134 is operated.

In a conventional slot machine, a real medal is lent out, the real medal is inserted to secure a credit, and the bet number is set using the credit. In such a conventional slot machine, not only the bet medals but also the stored medals are included (for example, the maximum number of bets is 3 and the maximum number of medals that can be stored is 50). 53 sheets including the sheets are settled). When this settlement process is completed, a demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 may execute a process of displaying the demo screen on the effect image display device 157. That is, there is some time during the settlement process, which may involve the physical discharge of medals. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs an effect related to settlement based on this settlement button command, and when the settlement is completed, a demo Move to a demo production based on commands.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, which does not require an actual medal, the target of settlement is the medal bet (currently the number of bets, maximum of 3), and the physical medal is not discharged. The processing time related to settlement is very short. Therefore, after the settlement button 134 is pressed, the processing time related to the settlement is short, and the demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400 without delay. Therefore, if the specifications are such that the effect is executed based on the execution of the settlement process, this effect is performed only for a short time before the demo effect, and the player may feel uncomfortable. There is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 64, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 produces an effect based on this settlement button command. (Output of settlement sound, etc.) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 64, the settlement button 134 is operated and the settlement operation is performed in a state where the bet operation is performed and the "current bet number" is three. By this settlement operation, the number of bets (3) is added to the "number of game medals" to increase from 65 to 68.

FIG. 64 shows the speaker 272 and the effect image display device 157. Even if the settlement operation is performed, the settlement sound is not output from the speaker 272. Further, the game background display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the settlement display is not displayed. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 64 immediately switches to the demo display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the demo effect based on the reception of the settlement button command (or the demo command immediately after the settlement button command). In this example, only the demo production is executed at the start of the demo, making the start of the demo clearer.

It should be noted that the specification may be such that the settlement effect is executed (for example, it is executed for 2 seconds). While this settlement effect is executed, even if the demo effect is started, the settlement effect is continued so that both effects are executed. Although it is expected that the frequency of settlement operations will be less than that of conventional slot machines, there is a possibility that settlement operations will be performed due to fraudulent acts (so-called goto acts), so there are settlement processes around. Let them know that.

Subsequently, an example in which the number of sheets to be counted changes according to the length of the operation time of the counting button 171 will be described.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of sheets to be counted may increase as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. In this example, instead of the planned counting number updating process shown in FIG. 38, the scheduled counting number updating process shown in FIG. 56 is adopted.

FIG. 65A is a table showing specific values of the counting long press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the planned counting number update process shown in FIG. 56. In this table, the value of the count long press timer is set for each long press step value. That is, while the value of the long press step value becomes 1 to 4, as the long press step value increases, the value of the count long press timer decreases by a predetermined time (here, 300 ms). That is, the value of the count long press timer is gradually shortened. When the value of the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the count long press timer becomes a constant value (300 ms in this case).

FIG. 65B is a table showing specific values of the planned counting number used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the scheduled counting number updating process shown in FIG. 56. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press step value. That is, while the value of the long press step value becomes 1 to 4, as the long press step value increases, the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases stepwise according to the operation time of the counting button 171. Even if the same value is set a plurality of times, the number of sheets to be counted will increase stepwise as a result. For example, even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set as 10 → 10 → 20 → 20 → 20 → 30 → 30 → 30 → 30 ..., As a result, the number is gradually increased. When the value of the long press step value is 4 or more, the value of the number of sheets to be counted becomes a constant value (50 sheets in this case).

FIG. 65 (c) is a timing chart when counting is performed using the counting long press timer shown in FIG. 65 (a) and the planned counting number shown in FIG. 65 (b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 65 (c), the timing at which the counting notification is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is described as “counting timing”. This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). On the other hand, at the top of the timing chart, a timing chart showing the state in which the count button 171 is operated as an ON state is shown.

From the time when the count button 171 changes from the OFF state to the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) having a long press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 56), and the timer When the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is maintained until the value becomes "1", 10 sheets are set as the planned counting number (step S4222 shown in FIG. 56). Then, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.9 seconds) having a long press step value of 2 is set (step shown in FIG. 56). S4221). If the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is maintained until 0.9 seconds set in the counting long press timer elapses, the counting timing of 10 sheets set as the planned counting number is 0. It will be counted every 3 seconds.

Eventually, when the value of the counting long press timer becomes "1" while the counting button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets are set as the planned counting number (step S4222 shown in FIG. 56). Subsequently, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.6 seconds) having a long press step value of 3 is set (shown in FIG. 56). Step S4221). If the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is maintained until 0.6 seconds set in the counting long press timer elapses, the counting timing of 20 sheets set as the planned counting number is 0. It will be counted every 3 seconds.

When the value of the counting long press timer becomes "1" again while the counting button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets are set as the planned counting number (step S4222 shown in FIG. 56). Further, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, a count long press timer (value for 0.3 seconds) having a long press step value of 4 is set (step shown in FIG. 56). S4221). If the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is maintained until 0.3 seconds set in the long-press timer for counting elapses, the counting timing comes for 30 sheets set as the planned number of sheets to be counted. It will be counted by that.

Then, when the value of the counting long press timer becomes "1" while the counting button 171 is operated, 50 sheets are set as the planned counting number (step S4222 shown in FIG. 56). After that, the value for 0.3 seconds is repeatedly set in the counting long press timer (step S4221 shown in FIG. 56), and 50 sheets are repeatedly set as the planned counting number (step S4222 shown in FIG. 56). As a result, if the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is maintained, 50 sheets will be counted each time the counting timing comes.

In the example described here, as the operation time of the counting button 171 becomes longer, the value of the counting long press timer becomes shorter and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases, but the operating time of the counting button 171 becomes longer. As the value becomes longer, the value of the long-press counting timer becomes longer and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase, or the value of the long-pressing counting timer becomes longer and the value of the number of sheets scheduled to be counted decreases. The value of the count long press timer may be shortened, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may decrease.

Further, until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, the value set in the count long press timer is gradually shortened and the value of the planned number of counts is gradually increased. You may.

FIG. 66 (a) is a timing chart showing an example following the example shown in FIG. 65 (c).

In the example shown in FIG. 65 (c), after the long press step value reaches 4, the value of the counting long press timer becomes constant in the shortest 0.3 seconds, and the planned counting number becomes constant at the maximum of 50 sheets. become. This state may be continued until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0, but when the number of game medals falls below a certain value (for example, 300), the final stage processing is executed. You may try to do it. The final stage processing referred to here is a processing in which the value of the counting long press timer is lengthened and the value of the planned counting number is decreased as the number of game medals decreases.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 66A, the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is displayed. At the left end of this timing chart, the value of the count long press timer is set to the value for 0.3 seconds, and with the planned count number set to 50, the "game medal number" becomes 299. The "number of game medals" is below a certain value (300).

If the value of the long-press timer for counting becomes "1" while the counting button 171 is being operated, 50 sheets are set again as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step SS4222 shown in FIG. 56). The number of sheets set at this timing may be less than 50 (for example, 30). Further, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the counting button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the counting long press timer is set to the value for 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 56), and the value becomes longer.

Eventually, when the value of the counting long press timer becomes "1" while the counting button 171 is being operated, 30 sheets are set as the planned counting number (step S4222 shown in FIG. 56). Further, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the counting button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the counting long press timer is set to the value for 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 56), and the value becomes longer.

When the value of the counting long press timer becomes "1" again while the counting button 171 is being operated, 20 sheets are set as the planned counting number (step S4222 shown in FIG. 56). Further, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the counting button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the counting long press timer is set to the value for 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 56), which is further lengthened.

Then, when the value of the counting long press timer becomes "1" while the counting button 171 is operated, 20 sheets are set again as the planned counting number (step S4222 shown in FIG. 56). The number of sheets to be counted may be set to less than 20 (for example, 10). Further, when the value of the timer becomes "0" while the counting button 171 is in the ON state, the value of the counting long press timer is set to the value for 1.2 seconds again in step S4221 shown in FIG. 56). A value exceeding the value for 1.2 seconds (for example, a value for 1.5 seconds) may be set as the value of the count long press timer. In the example shown in FIG. 66A, after the "number of game medals" reaches 9, the hand is released from the counting button 171 and the counting button 171 is turned off. As a result, the counting ends when the "number of game medals" is nine.

In the final stage processing described above, the number of sheets to be counted gradually decreases, and the value of the counting long press timer becomes longer. Therefore, it is unintentionally delayed to release the counting button 171. It is reduced that the "number of game medals" becomes 0. If you want to set the "number of game medals" to 0, you may continue to operate the counting button 171 until the display of the game medal number display device 170 becomes "0".

FIG. 66 (b) is a timing chart showing an example in the case of the example shown in FIG. 65 (c), in which a power failure occurs in a state where the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 30, and then the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 66B, the counting button 171 remains operated even after the power is cut off and before the power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, some players do not let go of the counting button 171 even if it turns out that the power has been cut off. However, this is until the case where the counting button 171 is still operated between the time when the power is cut off and the time when the power is restored is taken into consideration, and the counting button 171 is actually operated before the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. When the power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the on signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal indicating the on / off state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. In this case, if the on signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long press operation, has passed, the medal number control unit 350 has the maximum number of medals to be counted (50 in this example). ) Is set (step S4222 shown in FIG. 56). Even if the control is interrupted due to the power interruption, it is possible to reflect that the counting button 171 has been operated for a long period of time after the power is restored.

After the power is restored, a number slightly smaller than the maximum number (for example, 30) may be set. Alternatively, the planned number of sheets to be counted at the time of power failure may be reset.

Further, although the description here is the number of sheets to be counted, the same applies to the value of the counting long press timer. That is, when the power is restored while the counting button 171 is still operated, the medal number control unit 350 sets the value for the shortest time (value for 300ms in this example) as the value of the counting long press timer. (Step S4221 shown in FIG. 56).

FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing an example in which the planned counting number update process of FIG. 57 is adopted.

When the operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing of A and 0.5 seconds elapses (timing of B) while it is in the ON state, a long press operation is performed and 50 sheets are counted. Furthermore, if 1.5 seconds (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: C timing) elapses in the ON state, automatic counting is performed even if the hand is released from the counting button 171 and counting for 0.3 seconds. Every time the timing comes, 50 sheets are counted. This automatic counting is continued until the value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 becomes 0. Therefore, the number of game medals can be reduced to 0 at an early stage by a time-consuming operation.

When the automatic counting is started, the change display on the game medal number display device 170 described with reference to FIG. 60B is not performed, and the display number on the game medal number display device 170 is reduced in units of 50. go. In the 7-segment display which is the game medal number display device 170, the change display in which 1 is subtracted at intervals of about 4 ms shows that all 7 segments are fully lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to the afterimage. It may look like. Moreover, if the change display is continued until the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" becomes 0, the current number of displayed medals may become difficult to understand. In addition, a player who selects automatic counting often wants to set the number of game medals in the "number of game medals" to 0, and there is little need to display a change display to show how the numbers are subtracted one by one. be.

Further, since the player does not operate during the period when the automatic counting is performed, it is preferable to notify that the automatic counting is performed by a lamp or the like. In addition, if there is a payout based on the game result during the automatic counting, the payout amount is also included in the target of the automatic counting. That is, the number of medals paid out during the automatic counting is added to the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358, and will be included in the target from the next counting.

FIG. 68A is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 reaches a certain value.

When the operation of the counting button 171 is performed 2.0 seconds after the start of the operation, automatic counting is started, and 50 sheets are counted each time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds is reached. In FIG. 68A, the value of the “game medal number” stored in the RAM 358 is also shown under the “counting number”. In this example, the "number of game medals" is around 147, and the hand is released from the counting button 171. However, the "number of game medals" continues to decrease due to the automatic counting. Eventually, when the "number of game medals" becomes less than a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, 50 in this case), the automatic counting automatically ends, and the counting button 171 must be operated. If so, the "number of game medals" will not decrease. Here, the remaining 47 sheets remain without being automatically counted. If you want to continue the game after automatic counting, you can start the game quickly because there are remaining numbers. You may want to count all game medals. To start counting again, the counting button 171 is operated again. For example, if a long press operation is performed for 0.5 seconds, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. Although a certain value is set to 50 sheets, a certain value may be set by the player. For example, the player may be able to select from 0, 20, and 50 sheets. You can leave your favorite number of game medals after counting. A certain value may be set according to the game state. For example, in the normal gaming state, a certain value is set to 0, and in the privileged gaming state such as during an AT game, a certain value is set to 50. Since it is unlikely that the game will end in the privileged game state, the game can be started promptly by leaving a certain number of game medals. A certain value may be set according to the number of automatically counted game medals. For example, when the number of game medals less than 100 is counted, a certain value is set to 0, and when the number of game medals of 100 or more is counted, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals is counted, it is possible that the purpose was to exchange the counted number of game medals for a prize such as a beverage, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after the automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started promptly. And vice versa. When a large number of game medals are counted, it is possible that the purpose was to temporarily count the numbers by executing a notification or the like prompting the counting, and there is a possibility that the game will be continued after the automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, the game can be started promptly.

FIG. 68B is a timing chart showing an example in which a power failure occurs during automatic counting and the power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 68 (b), automatic counting is started and the counting button 171 is released. A power failure occurs in a state where 50 medals are counted every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives by automatic counting. After that, the power is restored, but if the count button 171 is operated again at the timing of this power recovery, or if the operation of the count button 171 is started during the power failure and the power is restored in the state of being operated. After the power is restored, an on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is detected. If this on-signal is detected at the time of power recovery, the automatic counting is started even if the determination time of the automatic counting start of 2 seconds has not elapsed. That is, 50 sheets are counted when the first counting timing arrives after the power is restored. Therefore, even if the counting button 171 is released 2 seconds before the power is restored, the automatic counting is started.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a display example showing that automatic counting is in progress.

FIG. 69 shows an effect image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and a game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

The upper side of FIG. 69 shows the state during counting before the automatic counting is started. In other words, the number of sheets to be counted is determined by the operation mode (long press or one or a plurality of short presses) of the counting button 171. In this state, the character display of "counting" is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background is displayed. That is, the character display of "counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Further, in the game medal number display device 170 shown on the upper side, the segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower side of FIG. 69 shows a state in which automatic counting is performed. When the automatic counting is started, the medal number control unit 350 sends a command to the game control unit 302 including the automatic counting information indicating that the counting is based on the automatic counting in the counting number information of the medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 transmits the security command to the first sub-control unit 400, including the above-mentioned automatic counting information in addition to the information indicating the number of counting sheets in the security command. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the characters "automatically counting" and the message 157m. In the state where automatic counting is performed, automatic counting status notification is performed. In the state where the automatic counting is performed, the notification may be performed by a sound or a lamp. In FIG. 69, the character display of "automatically counting" is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background is displayed. Below that, there is an explanation about how to handle the counting button 171 during automatic counting, such as "Even if you take your hand off the button, counting will continue." In the state where the automatic counting status notification is being performed, the button operation unnecessary notification is performed. In addition, there is an explanation that "you can play games". While the automatic counting status notification is being performed, the game progress notification is performed. It is informed that the game can proceed such as the operation of the start lever 135 and the operation of the stop buttons 130 to 132 even during the automatic counting. During the counting process, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 are not accepted. Since it is expected that the automatic counting may be manually terminated after the automatic counting is started, if the counting button 171 is operated again after the automatic counting is started, the automatic counting is terminated. May be good. That is, when the medal number control unit 350 detects the up edge of the signal indicating the on / off state of the counting button 171 during the automatic counting, the automatic counting ends. When the automatic counting ends, the automatic counting status notification ends.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

When the operation of the counting button 171 is started at the timing of A and 0.5 seconds elapses (timing of B) while it is in the ON state, a long press operation is performed and 50 sheets are counted. Further, when 1.5 seconds (cumulative 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: C timing) have elapsed in the ON state, automatic counting is performed even if the counting button 171 is released. In this example, from the time when the first counting timing arrives after 2.0 seconds have elapsed, the counting sound indicating that the automatic counting has started is output from the speaker 272. The counting sound may be output from the time when 2.0 seconds have elapsed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, but it may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the volume as time passes, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative counting amount is increasing. The first counting sound output first and the second counting sound output next are continuously output, and the second counting sound and the third counting sound output next are also continuously output, and the third counting sound is output. The sound and the fourth counting sound to be output next are also output continuously. In addition to the volume, the rhythm, pitch, timbre, etc. may be changed. That is, the counting sound may change stepwise. For example, the n + 1th counting sound may be a counting sound having a faster rhythm than the nth counting sound, or may be a counting sound having a higher pitch. Note that the volume may not increase at predetermined time intervals, and only the timbre may change at predetermined time intervals. For example, the first counting sound is a sound consisting of only the musical instrument sound A, the second counting sound is a sound consisting of a plurality of sounds obtained by adding the musical instrument sound B to the musical instrument sound A, and the third counting sound is a sound consisting of the musical instrument sound A. It is assumed that the sound consists of a plurality of sounds obtained by adding the instrument sound C to the instrument sound B. It is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative counting amount is increasing.

On the other hand, if the output of the counting sound is continued during counting, the player may feel uncomfortable. For example, if the 5000 cards acquired by the game are counted at one time, it takes about 50 seconds. If the counting sound is continuously output during this period, it may be jarring or disliked by the adjacent player. As a countermeasure in these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time elapses, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined time and then silenced (volume 0). In addition, the volume of the counting sound may be lowered as time elapses, and when the counting sound is output for a predetermined time, it may be a constant sound (volume 1).

Furthermore, in the case of a slot machine equipped with a function that allows the player to perform various customizations, the type and volume of the counting sound and how to change it (for example, whether to raise or lower the volume), etc. It may be possible for the player to select. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest at the time of counting.

In addition to the sound, the lamp may be made to emit light or an image may be output, and the light emitting mode of the lamp and the image may be changed stepwise.

FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs before the elapse of 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long press operation, after the operation of the counting button 171 is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and a power failure occurs before the counting long press flag described with reference to FIG. 38 (or FIG. 56, FIG. 57) is set to ON. The count button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power failure, the power may be restored before the counting button 171 is released. Alternatively, some players do not let go of the counting button 171 even if it turns out that the power has been cut off. However, this is until the case where the counting button 171 is still operated between the time when the power is cut off and the time when the power is restored is taken into consideration, and the counting button 171 is actually operated before the power is restored. I don't know if it stayed. When the power is restored while the counting button 171 is being operated, the on signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal indicating the on / off state of the counting button 171 after the power is restored. If the on-signal is detected without detecting the up edge after the power is restored, the medal number control unit 350 determines that the count button 171 has been continuously operated, and 0.5 seconds again from the time of the power recovery. It is determined whether or not the count button 171 remains operated until the elapse. Here, if the state in which the counting button 171 is operated continues, the count long press flag is set to ON, and if the state in which the counting button 171 is operated continues, 50 sheets are counted at the counting timing. It is counted.

If a long press is performed after the power is restored, a notification during the long press may be performed. The long press notification is started from this point if the long press is continued at the time when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed after the power is restored. This means that if the counting button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have passed, it will not be pressed and held, and counting will occur after 0.5 seconds have passed and before the first counting timing has arrived. When the button 171 is released, no one is counted, so it is long on condition that the long press is continued when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have passed. Pressing notification is started.

If the hand is released from the counting button 171 before 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the power is restored, one sheet is counted, but it is also possible that the operation is erroneous. Therefore, if the operation of the counting button 171 is completed within 0.5 seconds immediately after the power is turned on, it may be possible not to count even one sheet as an erroneous operation.

Note that FIG. 71B shows an example in which the start of operation of the counting button 171 is determined by detecting only the up edge of the signal indicating the on / off state of the counting button 171.

According to the example shown in FIG. 71 (b), since the counting button 171 is still operated during the power failure, the up edge of the signal indicating the on / off state of the counting button 171 is not detected after the power is restored. No matter how long the counting button 171 is continuously operated, the long press determination is not performed and the counting is not performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 71 (a), since the long press determination is performed based on whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the on signal of the count button 171 was detected, even if the up edge is not detected. The long press judgment is executed.

FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 71.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 72 (a), the power failure occurs when X seconds shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long press operation, elapses after the operation of the counting button 171 is started. After that, the power is restored.

After the power is restored, if the on signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal indicating the on / off state of the count button 171, press and hold the X seconds that had passed before the power failure. If the operation of the count button 171 is continued for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) by subtracting from the determination time of 0.5 seconds, the count button 171 is operated for 0.5 seconds. The count long press flag is set to on, assuming that it was still in the state.

Even in the modified example shown in FIG. 72 (b), the power failure occurs when X seconds shorter than 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long press operation, elapses after the operation of the counting button 171 is started. Restore power.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 72 (b), a standby process for a certain period (standby time of 2 seconds in this example) is provided at the time of power recovery (when the power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after the power is turned on, the processing related to the counting button 171 is performed after waiting until an appropriate timing for performing the counting processing is reached. When the waiting time elapses, the process related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 72A. That is, when the on signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal indicating the on / off state of the count button 171, the X seconds that have passed before the power failure are determined by the long press operation. Subtract from the time of 0.5 seconds, and if the operation of the count button 171 is continued for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the waiting time elapses, the count button will be displayed for 0.5 seconds. Assuming that 171 is still in operation, the count long press flag is set to on.

FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing another modification of the example shown in FIG. 71.

In the third modification shown in FIG. 73A, the power is cut off before the time 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for the long press operation, elapses after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and then the power is restored. ..

After the power is restored (power is turned on), the medal count control unit 350 operates the count button 171 when the on signal is detected without detecting the up edge of the signal indicating the on / off state of the count button 171. It is determined that the signal has been continued, and a dedicated timer is activated when the power is turned on. This timer measures a time (for example, 2 seconds) longer than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, 2000 ms is set as the initial value dedicated to when the power is turned on to the count long press timer in which 500 ms is set as the initial value in step S4206 in FIG. 38. By doing so, for the long press operation immediately after the power is turned on, the count long press flag is set to on when the long operation is performed, and when the count timing arrives while the count button 171 continues to be operated, 50 Sheets are counted.

In the fourth modification shown in FIG. 73 (b), the power is cut off before the elapse of 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time of the long press operation, after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and then the power is restored. .. In this example, the counting button 171 is released during the power failure, and the operation ends. Therefore, at the time of power recovery (power on), the on signal indicating the on state of the counting button 171 is not detected. Then, in this fourth modification, a timer dedicated to power-on is activated in accordance with power-on. This timer measures a time (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Further, the timer set value dedicated to power-on in this example is longer than the timer set value dedicated to power-on in the third modification (for example, 2 seconds). If the operation of the counting button 171 is started while the timer dedicated to turning on the power is counting, and the operation of the counting button 171 continues even after 3 seconds have passed, the long press flag of the counting button is set to on. NS. That is, while this timer is timing, at least one of the up edge and the on signal of the signal indicating the on / off state of the count button 171 is detected, and the on signal is detected even when 3 seconds have elapsed. If so, the count long press flag is set to on. Then, when the counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 continues to be operated, 50 sheets are counted.

Subsequently, the display mode of the game medal number display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display described with reference to FIG. 60B, will be described in detail once again.

FIG. 74A is a diagram showing an example of change display (subtraction) in the game medal number display device 170.

As shown at the top of FIG. 74 (a), the number "100" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number obtained by subtracting "1" at intervals of about 4 ms in the display display process shown in FIG. 52. FIG. 74A shows a state in which “99” → “98” → “97” → “96” → “95” → “94” and “1” are subtracted at a time.

When 50 sheets are counted by the long press operation of the counting button 171, the time required for the change display is about 4 ms × 50 = about 200 ms in order to display the change by “1” at intervals of about 4 ms. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be subtracted is shorter than the cycle of the counting timing, and it is possible to perform the change display by subtracting 50 sheets.

FIG. 74B is a diagram showing an example of change display (addition) in the game medal number display device 170.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown at the top of FIG. 74 (b). When the change display is started, the game medal number display device 170 displays a number added by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms, which is the same as the change display at the time of subtraction. FIG. 74 (b) shows how "101"-> "102"-> "103"-> "104"-> "105"-> "106" and "1" are added at a time.

When 50 cards are lent out by operating the lending button 707 and 15 cards (corresponding to the maximum number of cards allowed to be paid out according to the rules) are paid out as a result of the game, "1" is given at intervals of about 4 ms. In order to display the change (addition / subtraction) one by one, the time required for the change display is about 4 ms × 65 = about 260 ms. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time of the change display to be added is shorter than the cycle of the counting timing, and it is possible to perform the change display in which 65 sheets are added.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of another change display in the game medal number display device 170. Since the player may not notice the change in the display content of the game medal number display device 170, this is an example of notifying that the display content has changed.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 75 (a). In the example here, the change display is performed using all the digits, and it becomes easy to recognize that the change is in progress. When changing from the number "100" to the number "85", the display in which all segments of all five digits are lit (display of "88888") and all segments of all five digits are turned off. In this example, the displayed display (display of "00000") is switched and displayed every 8 ms. Eventually, in this example, after 250 ms, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. Since the change display is performed using all the digits, it is possible to confirm whether or not a failure that is not displayed has occurred in the segment of all the digits of the game medal number display device 170. If it can be recognized that no failure has occurred, it can be recognized that the numbers displayed after the change display are correct.

Although all digits are used in the change display here, only some digits may be used in order to reduce the processing load and the data capacity. For example, a one-digit display, a two-digit display, or a three-digit display including the one digit on the far right is performed. If you do not use all the digits and do not include the rightmost single digit, it may give the impression that the rightmost single digit segment has failed, so it means that there is no failure. Include the rightmost digit.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 shown in FIG. 75 (b). Also in the example here, the number changes from "100" to "85". That is, it changes from a 3-digit number to a 2-digit number. Therefore, a change display using a three-digit segment is performed. The change display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, and it appears that the segment is orbiting. According to this change display, it is possible to give the impression that the change starts from "100". Then, in this example, when 250 ms has elapsed from the start of the change display, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

If the change display is performed using a 2-digit segment instead of a 3-digit segment, it is possible to give an impression of change with "85" as the end point.

As described above, while sandwiching the two types of change displays described with reference to FIG. 75, a predetermined number (for example, 20) may be displayed to gradually change toward the target value. Specifically, when the value finally changes from "100" to "60" (target value), "100"-> change display-> "80"-> change display-> "60" is displayed. Become. Further, when a full-color 7-segment LED display is used as the game medal number display device 170, the emission color of the segment may be changed when the segment is lit during the change display.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example in which the “game medal number” stored in the RAM 358 is displayed by the effect image display device 157 in addition to the game medal number display device 170.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits a command including information indicating the “game medal number” (the number of game medals displayed in FIG. 9) to the game control unit 302 as a medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 includes information indicating "the number of game medals" in the security command, and transmits the security command to the first sub-control unit 400. The security command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals. The second sub-control unit 500 receives information representing the "number of game medals" via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the effect image display device 157 to display the "number of game medals". In this example, the "number of game medals" is always displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157.

In this example, the display of the "number of game medals" in the effect image display device 157 displays the number of medals as it is according to the information indicating the "number of game medals" included in the security command transmitted at 100 ms intervals. .. The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 76 displays the number “100” according to the previous security command. In addition, the number "100" is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170 displayed on the far left. In this state, the counting button 171 is pressed and held to count 50 sheets. The medal number control unit 350 starts executing the display display process shown in FIG. 52, and the game medal number display device 170 starts a change display in which "1" is subtracted at intervals of about 4 ms. It should be noted that in FIG. 76, the display during the change display is shown in such a way that the seven segments are all lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to the afterimage. In the game medal number display device 170, a change display in which "1" is subtracted is performed over about 200 ms, and a number of "50" is displayed about 200 ms after counting 50 medals.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when 50 medals are counted, security including information indicating that the "game medal number" is 50 during the security command transmission period (100 ms). Receive a command. In the example shown in FIG. 76, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command and the display process is executed when about 20 ms has elapsed from the counting of 50 sheets. The display process here is a frame replacement process for replacing the image displaying "100" with the image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays the number "50" before the change display on the game medal number display device 170 is completed.

In the example of FIG. 76 described above, the sub-control unit (400,500) on the side that receives the information on the “number of game medals” does not display the change, and the main control unit 300 on the side that outputs the information does not display the change. Display changes. By doing so, the numerical value "50" finally displayed by the game medal number display device 170 can be grasped from the display on the effect image display device 157, and "50" is displayed on the game medal number display device 170. It can be recognized that the change display is completed at that point.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 76.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 77, even in the display of the "game medal number" in the effect image display device 157, a change display in which "1" is subtracted is performed. Moreover, the change display is performed over a longer period of time than the change display on the game medal number display device 170. Specifically, the change display in the effect image display device 157 is performed over 280 ms. During this time of 280 ms, 50 medals are lent out by operating the lending button 707, and 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals to be paid out) are paid out as a result of the game. It is longer than the time required for displaying the addition change (about 4 ms × 65 = about 260 ms), and is less than 300 ms, which is the cycle of the counting timing.

The player usually looks at the effect image display device 157, and rarely looks at the game medal number display device 170. As described above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not keep storing too many "game medals", and it is desired to increase the operation frequency of the counting button 171. For that purpose, it is necessary to have the player pay attention to the "number of game medals". The reason why the "number of game medals" is also displayed on the effect image display device 157 is to make the player pay attention to the "number of game medals" as much as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays an attractive effect display such as a game background display, the player is distracted by the attractive effect display even if the "number of game medals" is displayed. It tends to be. Therefore, as in this modification, if the display of the "game medal number" on the effect image display device 157 takes longer than the display on the game medal number display device 170, the player can display the display. It can be expected that they will also pay attention to the fast game medal number display device 170. If you look at the game medal number display device 170, the effect display is not displayed on the game medal number display device 170, and the player can firmly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for people to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and it can be expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase.

In addition, in the change display in the effect image display device 157, not only the changing character display but also the animation display indicating that the change is in progress is displayed, so that the "number of game medals" can be easily attracted attention, and the counting is also performed here. It can be expected that the operation frequency of the button 171 will increase. By making the change display by the effect image display device 157 a different mode from the change display by the game medal number display device 170, it is possible to make the change display suitable for the period of the change display. The change display by the effect image display device 157 may be displayed in the same manner as the change display by the game medal number display device 170. It is easy to recognize that the change display is being performed.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing another example completely different from the example shown in FIG. 76.

In another example shown in FIG. 78, the change display is not performed on the game medal number display device 170, and the change display is performed only on the display of the “game medal number” on the effect image display device 157. That is, in this alternative example, the display display process shown in FIG. 52 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the number "50" is immediately displayed on the game medal number display device 170. On the other hand, even if the effect image display device 157 receives a security command, it does not immediately display according to the information indicating the "number of game medals" included in the security command, but subtracts "1" at a time. The change display is performed.

In this alternative example as well, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 77, the display of the "game medal number" on the effect image display device 157 takes longer than the display on the game medal number display device 170, so that the player can use the display. It can be expected that the game medal number display device 170, which displays quickly, will also pay attention to it. If you look at the game medal number display device 170, the player can firmly recognize the "game medal number". As a result, it becomes easier for people to notice that the number of game medals has been accumulated, and it can be expected that the frequency of operation of the counting button 171 will increase. In addition, the medal number control unit 350 reduces the amount of data for displaying changes and reduces the processing load.

FIG. 79 (a) is a timing chart when a payout is attempted to exceed the payout threshold value.

FIG. 79 (a) shows the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358. Below that, the number of payouts to be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal number control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16383 "game medals". That is, the maximum number of RAM 358 stored is 16383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum number of stored sheets.

With the "number of game medals" stored up to 16373, 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals allowed by the rules), which corresponds to the maximum number of medals to be paid out, are further paid out. The 15 payouts are included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal number control unit 350. When the number of payouts of 15 is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum number of stored medals and exceeds the payout threshold value in step S4B03 of FIG. 48. Therefore, the payout response command includes an "abnormality" and is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. When the payout response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 transmits a command indicating that the number of game medals overflows (cannot be added by payout) to the first sub-control unit 400. (Step S1608 shown in FIG. 20). On the sub-control unit (400,500) side, an error notification exceeding the upper limit is performed based on this command. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (a), the effect image display device 157 displaying the game background display counts that the payout threshold has been exceeded as an error notification for exceeding the upper limit so as to overlap the game background display. A character display prompting the operation of the button 171 is displayed. That is, the error notification exceeding the upper limit is executed even during the game.

As an error notification for exceeding the upper limit, an error sound may be output from the speaker 272, or the lamp may be turned on.

FIG. 79B is a diagram showing another example of the upper limit exceeding error notification.

As an error notification for exceeding the upper limit, a blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed. In the example shown in FIG. 79 (b), the character display of the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the error notification for exceeding the upper limit is displayed so as to overlap the game background display during the game, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid causing a disadvantage to the player, a blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display is easy to see.

When the game control unit 302 receives the payout response command including "normal" from the medal number control unit 350, the game control unit 302 transmits the payout command to the first sub control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 20). On the sub-control unit (400, 500) side, when the payout command is received while the upper limit exceeding error notification is being executed, the execution of the upper limit exceeding error notification is terminated. If the counting button 171 is operated, the error notification exceeding the upper limit may be terminated regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if it takes time for the counting process, the upper limit exceeding error notification can be terminated at an early stage.

In addition, information representing the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is included in the security command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If the transmitted information indicating the "number of game medals" is the number of payout threshold values (16383), the sub-control unit (400,500) may notify the upper limit arrival error. good. For example, the effect image display device 157 may display the characters "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the count button." Then, this upper limit arrival error notification ends when the transmitted information indicating the "number of game medals" becomes less than the payout threshold value (16383). If the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit arrival error notification may be terminated regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, even if it takes time for the counting process, the upper limit arrival error notification can be terminated at an early stage.

In addition, in other cases where the "number of game medals" is added, there are cases where payment is made and cases where there is a loan from the lending machine 700. In the present embodiment, the upper limit has not been determined for settlement, but the upper limit may be determined in the same manner as in the case of payout. For example, even if the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of stored sheets and the settlement threshold is exceeded by settlement, "abnormality" is included in the settlement response command, and the medal number control unit 350 is transferred to the game control unit 302. Make it sent. Then, the game control unit 302 transmits an error generation command indicating that an error exceeding the upper limit of the number of displayed game medals has occurred to the first sub-control unit 400 even when the settlement response command includes "abnormality". , On the sub-control unit (400, 500) side, the upper limit exceeding error notification is performed. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a number smaller than the maximum storage number (for example, 15,000), and if the "game medal number" exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an error exceeding the upper limit occurs. , Lending is not accepted (when the determination in step S3712 in FIG. 34 is No), and the "number of game medals" is not added. The notification of the lending error exceeding the upper limit is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700. However, the effect image display device 157 is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302, and further from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 that the upper limit lending error has occurred. , Speaker 272, lamp, etc. can be notified on the slot machine 100 side.

FIG. 80A is a timing chart when the payout is attempted to exceed the second threshold value for payout.

Also in FIG. 80 (a), the value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 is shown, and the number of payouts to be added to the "game medal number" is shown below the value.

A command including the number of game medals displayed (number of game medals) is transmitted from the medal number control unit 350 to the game control unit 302 as a medal number control state command. The game control unit 302 is set with a second payout threshold (for example, 15,000), which is smaller than 16383 (payout threshold), which is the maximum number of RAM 358 stored. In the game control unit 302, when the number of game medals displayed in the command transmitted is equal to or greater than the second threshold value for payout, an error near the upper limit of the number of game medals displayed has occurred in the first sub-control unit 400. Send an error occurrence command indicating that. On the sub-control unit (400, 500) side, the upper limit is near notification based on this error occurrence command. In the example shown in FIG. 80A, the effect image display device 157 displaying the game background display is provided with a character display prompting the operation of the count button 171 as an upper limit near notification so as to overlap the game background display. It is displayed. That is, also in this example, the upper limit approach notification is executed during the game. FIG. 79 (a) above shows the effect image display device 157 in which the display of the upper limit imminent notification is switched to the display of the upper limit exceeding error notification.

As the notification near the upper limit, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or the lamp may be turned on. In addition, it was decided that the upper limit near-up notification will continue from the start of the upper limit near-up notification until the upper limit exceeding error notification is started. It may be a notification that is carried out only for a part of the time. For example, the notification is performed one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the error notification exceeding the upper limit is the notification performed during one game. For example, if it is known that the privilege period of the AT game or the like is short even if the notification of the upper limit is started, the remaining AT game or the like can be easily prioritized. Further, when the notification is switched from the notification near the upper limit to the error notification exceeding the upper limit, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

FIG. 80B is a diagram showing another example of the upper limit imminent notification.

The upper limit is approaching notification, or blinking display on the effect image display device 157 may be performed. In the example shown in FIG. 80 (b), the character display of the upper limit imminent notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display every second. Since the upper limit imminent notification is also displayed during the game so as to overlap the game background display, the game background display becomes difficult to see. Therefore, in order to avoid causing a disadvantage to the player, a blinking display is performed to secure a period in which the game background display is easy to see.

When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal number control unit 350 that includes the number of game medals displayed that is less than the second threshold for payout, the first sub-control unit 400 receives an error that the number of game medals displayed is close to. Sends an error release command indicating that the release has occurred. On the sub-control unit (400,500) side, the execution of the upper limit imminent notification is terminated based on this error release command.

Further, a second threshold value for payout may be set in the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the information indicating the “number of game medals” included in the security command and transmitted is the number equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the sub-control unit (400, The 500) side may perform the above-mentioned upper limit imminent notification. Then, this upper limit imminent notification ends when the transmitted information indicating the "number of game medals" becomes less than the second threshold value for payout.

Further, a second threshold value for payout may be set in the medal number control unit 350. In this case, the medal number control unit 350 determines whether or not the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, and if the number is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the game is played. A notification command is transmitted to the control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a notification command to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. By doing so, the sub-control unit (400, 500) can also execute the upper limit near-up notification. Then, when it becomes less than the second threshold value for payout, the notification end command is transmitted by the route of the medal number control unit 350 → the game control unit 302 → the sub control unit (400, 500). It is preferable that the blinking cycle of the blinking display of the upper limit imminent notification is longer than the blinking cycle of the blinking display of the error notification exceeding the upper limit. If the blinking cycle is short by switching from the upper limit approach notification to the upper limit exceeded error notification, it becomes possible to easily recognize the high urgency of the notification. If the upper limit imminent notification is blinking, the upper limit error notification may be displayed at all times. It becomes possible to easily recognize the high urgency of notification.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example in which a highly urgent error notification overlaps with a notification prompting counting.

On the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 81 (a), the display of the upper limit imminent notification is displayed so as to overlap the game background display. The display of the upper limit imminent notification may be a constant display, but is a blinking display displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit is being notified. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control unit 302 transmits an error generation command indicating that a door opening error has occurred to the first sub control unit 400. On the sub-control unit (400,500) side, error notification is performed based on this error occurrence command. When the front door 102 is open, there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts (so-called goto acts) will be performed. Therefore, it is necessary to close the front door 102 as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is more urgent than the notification prompting the counting. Even when the front door 102 is open, the operation of the counting button 171 is accepted. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 81A displays an error notification display of a door opening error that overlaps with the game background display. The error notification display of the door opening error (hereinafter referred to as the door opening error display) is a character display of "the door is open" and is always displayed. This door opening error display is displayed on the same layer as the display of the upper limit imminent notification, but it may be displayed on the layer before the display of the upper limit imminent notification so as to overlap with the display of the upper limit imminent notification. .. Alternatively, since the door open error display is always displayed, it is displayed on the layer behind the upper limit near notification that is displayed blinking, and the display of the blinking upper limit near notification overlaps with the always displayed door open error display. You may do so.

FIG. 81B shows that the character display of the upper limit imminent notification is displayed every second with respect to the door opening error display which is always displayed. On the right side of FIG. 81B, it is shown that the character display of the upper limit imminent notification disappears due to the blinking display, and the remaining constant display door opening error display is displayed. In the state shown on the right side, the highly urgent door opening error display is easy to see. Further, the speaker 272 outputs a voice such as "The door is open" as an error notification of the door opening error, but does not output a notification sound for the notification that the upper limit is approaching.

Although it is not as urgent as the door opening error, "Please stop the spinning reel", wiring omission, wiring disconnection, and power failure of the lending machine 700 are suspected. "Communication error has occurred. ] May be displayed to request improvement, and a notification prompting counting may be performed along with these displays.

FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which the notification prompting the counting continues even after shifting to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, if there is no payout, all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and if there is a payout, the bet is made between the completion of the payout and the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If no operation is performed, the state shifts to the demonstration state (during demonstration). Also, when the settlement button 134 is operated, it shifts to the demo.

In the example shown in FIG. 82 (a), the character display of the upper limit imminent notification is started during the game (during betting, reel 110-112 rotation, or payout), and the process shifts to the demonstration without operating the counting button 171. .. In the effect image display device 157, the game background display was displayed during the game, but it is switched to the demo display during the demonstration. The demo display is a display that introduces a story or a character. Even if the game shifts during the demo, the display of the character display of the upper limit imminent notification will continue as long as the "number of game medals" does not fall below the second threshold for payout. If you move during the demonstration, players are more likely to leave. By prompting the operation of the counting button 171 even during the demonstration, it may be possible to prevent the player from leaving the slot machine 100 by taking out only the card from the lending machine 700 while leaving the game medal. The blinking display of the upper limit imminent notification may be continued to ensure the visibility of the demo display, or the blinking display of the upper limit imminent notification may be constantly displayed to ensure the visibility of the upper limit imminent notification.

FIG. 82B is a diagram showing an example of notification after the counting button 171 is operated during the demonstration.

A demo display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 82 (b). The notification prompting the count is displayed in the largest size so as to overlap the demo display. Here, since the operation of the counting button 171 is to be performed preferentially, the notification prompting the counting is the largest display. Furthermore, below that, a warning sign such as "Be careful not to forget or steal the card" is displayed to prevent the theft of the card while you are away from your desk. Further, in this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and "15300" exceeding the second threshold for payout is displayed. In some cases, the payout threshold value of "16383" may be displayed. The display of the "game medal number" in the effect image display device 157 may be constantly displayed, may be temporarily displayed, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 82 (a). good.

Eventually, the counting button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" is reduced to less than the second threshold for payout. Then, the notification prompting the count disappears (becomes hidden), and this time, the above caution display is displayed in the largest size and stands out. The display of the "number of game medals" displayed at the lower right of the effect image display device 157 is reduced to "14950".

FIG. 83A is a diagram showing an example of notification when the “number of game medals” exceeds a certain specified number such as a payout threshold value or a payout second threshold value and then falls below the specified number.

In FIG. 83A, the value of the “number of game medals” stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. The X sheets correspond to a certain specified number such as a payout threshold value and a payout second threshold value. In the effect image display device 157, since the "number of game medals" has exceeded the specified number, a notification prompting the counting is displayed. When the notification prompting the counting is displayed, the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and the "number of game medals" immediately becomes less than the specified number. Here, the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued. In this example, even if the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number, the notification prompting the counting is continued. That is, the notification prompting the counting is continued until the "number of game medals" is further reduced by a predetermined number (for example, 50 x 100 for 2 times) from the specified number. The arrow of the notification period in the figure indicates the period during which the notification prompting the counting such as "Please operate the counting button" is performed.

If the specification is such that notification is started when the specified number is reached and the notification is terminated immediately when the number is less than the specified number, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted. In this example, the specified number to start notification. Continue notification until the number is less than. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the repetition of notification and counting operations. Note that the notification prompting the counting may always be performed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals. You can be encouraged to count a large number.

The specified number may be a settlement threshold, a lending threshold, or another threshold.

In addition, when the "number of game medals" falls below the specified number due to the betting operation, the number of medals is reduced by a maximum of 3 in the first place, but the number of "game medals" is reduced by the above-mentioned predetermined number. Regardless of the value, the notification prompting the counting may be continued.

FIG. 83B is a diagram showing an example of notification for prompting counting when the “number of game medals” exceeds the second threshold for payout over a plurality of games.

When the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold value for payout (15000 in this example) in a certain game, the notification prompting the counting is started. The notification prompting the counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification prompting the counting is started, the player does not operate the counting button 171 and continues the game. As a result, the game continues without the "number of game medals" falling below the second threshold for payout. Here, when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold value for payout, a notification prompting the counting is performed once in a plurality of games (4 games in this example). Therefore, during the three games after the notification for prompting the counting is performed, the notification for prompting the counting is not performed. During the three games in which the notification for prompting the counting is not performed, the effect display such as the game background display displayed on the effect image display device 157 becomes easier to see, and the interest of the game may be improved. When the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout, the notification prompting the counting is not performed. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout during the three games in which the notification for prompting counting is not performed, the notification for prompting counting is performed until the next second threshold for payout is exceeded. I can't. On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second threshold for payout during the game in which the notification prompting the counting is performed, the notification prompting the counting disappears (becomes hidden). ).

Subsequently, the notification regarding the counting will be further described.

FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing an example in which a notification for prompting a count is performed each time the “number of game medals” increases by a predetermined number. In addition, in each figure ((a)-(c)) shown in FIG. 84, the value of "the number of game medals" stored in RAM 358 is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 84 (a), a notification prompting the counting is performed every time the "number of game medals" increases by 1000. First, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000, when the number exceeds 1000, a display prompting the counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157. These displays will continue to be displayed for a predetermined time, or will continue to be displayed until the next change in the "number of game medals" (hereinafter, the same applies). Therefore, it is displayed even during the game. Next, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 2000, when the number exceeds 2000, a display prompting the counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Further, when the "number of game medals" exceeds 3000, when the number exceeds 3000, a display prompting the counting is displayed on the effect image display device 157. After that, these notifications are repeated until the number exceeds 14,000. Then, when the "number of game medals" reaches the second threshold value of 15,000, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the display prompting the counting continues unless the "number of game medals" is less than 15,000. It will be displayed. When the number of medals reaches 15,000, the characters "15,000 or more" may be displayed and the display prompting the counting may be continuously displayed, or the "number of game medals" may be equal to or higher than the second threshold for payout. If it is equal to or less than the payout threshold value, the real value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (for example, "15015 cards have been reached"). Since the number of game medals is displayed on a regular basis, the number of game medals can be roughly grasped without looking at the game medal number display device 170. In the unlikely event that a problem occurs in the game table and the "number of game medals" disappears, it is possible to easily grasp how many medals have disappeared. It should be noted that a display prompting the counting may be performed according to the time elapsed since the start of the privilege game such as the AT game. For example, when 10 minutes have passed since the start of a privileged game such as an AT game, a display prompting for counting is displayed, when 20 minutes have passed, a display prompting for counting is displayed, and when 30 minutes have passed, counting is performed. Display to prompt. It can be displayed regularly regardless of the number of game medals.

FIG. 84B is a diagram showing an example in which the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player.

Here, the AT state is a state that is advantageous to the player. During the AT state, the "number of game medals" tends to increase due to payout. During the game in the AT state, the effect image display device 157 displays a display (AT game display) suggesting or indicating that the player is currently in the AT state. When the "number of game medals" exceeds 1000 in the AT state, it is counted as exceeding 1000 when the number of medals exceeds 1000, as shown in the effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 84 (b). Is displayed. In this example, the count button 171 continues to be pressed and held, and the "number of game medals" decreases to a certain value ("100" in this example).

The state advantageous to the player here means a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out. Therefore, the state is not limited to the AT state, and may be a state in which the bonus (RB, BB) is operating or an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to increase, and it can be said that the entire number of game medals may be counted (output to the lending machine 700). However, if all the number of game medals is counted, the number of input medals for the next game (for example, 3) will also be counted, and the next game cannot be played unless the rental machine 700 is lent out. I will end up. In addition, even if it is in an advantageous state, it may happen that the consumption of "game medals" is larger than the payout. Therefore, even if it is in an advantageous state, it is notified that a small amount of "game medals" should be left. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 84 (b) is in a situation where the "number of game medals" is reduced to 100 by counting in the AT state, and the effect image display device 157 "stops counting". There is a notification (counting end guidance notification) that it is better to keep a small amount of "game medals" such as "Please proceed with the game". That is, before the counting of all the game medals is completed, the counting end guidance notification is performed. In addition, instead of the counting end guidance notification shown here, a notification such as "It is better to keep the game value" or a notification such as "If all the numbers are counted, the game cannot be played" may be used. That is, the defect in the case where all the game medals are counted may be notified before the counting of all the game medals is completed.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 84 (b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and the counting ends when the hand is released from the counting button 171. In this example, the player who sees the notification that a small amount of "game medals" should be left is released from the counting button 171 and the counting ends when 50 is left as the "game medals". doing.

FIG. 84 (c) is a diagram showing an example in which the counting button 171 is operated in a state unfavorable to the player.

The disadvantageous state for the player here means a state in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease if the game is repeated without lending. For example, the normal state can be mentioned. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84 (c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or represents a normal state.

In the example shown in FIG. 84 (c), the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued with the "number of game medals" being 1000, and the "number of game medals" is set to a certain value ("100" in this example). It has decreased beyond. If it is disadvantageous to the player, it is less likely that the player will continue the game after the counting is completed, so a small amount of "game medals" should be left. In this example, the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued until the "number of game medals" becomes 0. When the "number of game medals" becomes 0, the character display "Please stop counting" is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 85 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 84 (b). Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 84 (b) will be mainly described.

In the example shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the counting operation is continued in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state) and the "number of game medals" is reduced to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), counting is performed. Even if the operation is continued, the counting operation is temporarily invalidated. That is, even if the long press operation of the counting button 171 is continued, the counting is temporarily ended. As a result, the decrease in the number of game medals stops once. FIG. 85A shows the effect image display device 157 when the “number of game medals” is reduced to 50, and the display screen thereof displays the message “counting has been completed”. ing. In order to restart the counting once forcibly terminated, a new operation of the counting button 171 is required.

FIG. 85 (b) is a diagram showing an example in which the counting once forcibly terminated is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 85 (b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 85 (a), and the counting operation is continued in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and the "game medal number" is increased. Since the value has decreased to a predetermined value (“50” in this example), the counting is forcibly terminated once. In this example, the player has a reason to stop the game even in an advantageous state, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the count button 171 again. In this modification, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or less than a predetermined value, the counting of "50" by the long press operation of the counting button 171 does not work, and even if the long pressing operation is performed, only "1" is counted. That is, the "number of game medals" decreases by "1" each time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives. This is because, for the same reason as described above, if all the number of game medals is counted, the number of medals inserted in the next game (for example, 3) will also be counted, and the lending machine 700 must be lent out. Since the next game will not be possible, the number of game medals is less likely to be 0, so only "1" is counted.

Eventually, when the number of game medals becomes 0, the character display "counting is completed" is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

When the player presses and holds the counting button 171 again, counting by "50" may be started. In the case of this example, since the number of game medals is reduced to "50", it becomes "0" at once, and the output of the "number of game medals" to the lending machine 700 is completed quickly.

The example shown in FIG. 85 (c) is an example of the modified example described with reference to FIGS. (A) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (for example, a normal state). Even in the modified example, if the player is in a disadvantageous state, the operation of pressing and holding the counting button 171 is effective until the "number of game medals" becomes 0, as in the example shown in FIG. 84 (c). When the "number of medals" becomes 0, the character display "Please stop counting" is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

However, in order to give the player a motivation to continue the game even in a state unfavorable to the player (for example, a normal state), the same processing as in the state advantageous to the player (FIG. 85 (a) and The process shown in FIG. 8B or the process shown in FIG. 84B may be performed.

Next, an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off will be described.

FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing an example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

A VL signal is transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350 in a state of being always on. If this VL signal is in the off state, it is suspected that the power of the rental machine 700 is not turned on, and there is a possibility that the rental machine 700 cannot be rented or counted. It is also possible that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the rental machine 700 is broken.

The medal number control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control unit 302 by a command in which the upper byte of the medal number control state commands shown in FIG. 9 is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives the VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the determination in step S1007 shown in FIG. 14 results in a No determination result, and the process proceeds to the previous process until the VL signal is turned on. I can't proceed. Therefore, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not considered to be an effective operation, and even if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the operation is not considered to be an effective operation. That is, some of the plurality of types of game progress operations are invalidated. In this embodiment, as a part of the operation, the operation performed in the first half of one game is targeted. Therefore, if the VL signal is turned off after the game is started (the rotation of the reel is started) by the operation of the first half, the operation of the second half (the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) is effective. be. Therefore, the game can be advanced although it is limited. If the operation is disabled while the timing of the operation to the stop buttons 137 to 139 is being determined, the operation becomes effective and it is necessary to determine the timing from the beginning, which may give an annoying impression. , The possibility of giving this annoying impression can be reduced. Further, if the operation until the winning or not of the internal winning of the game progress operations is determined by lottery is enabled even though the counting cannot be performed, for example, a result advantageous to the player is obtained and suddenly it is magnificent. When the production is started, there is a risk that the player's desire to proceed with the game may be heightened. As a result, there may be a delay in the countermeasures when the VL signal is turned off, but the possibility of this delay can be reduced. However, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be invalidated. It is possible to promptly notify the player that the VL signal has been turned off. Even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and notification regarding this is not executed. Further, if it is treated as an error, an error canceling operation is required, but since it is suspected that there is an abnormality on the lending machine 700 side if the VL signal is off, an error canceling operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). Does not require. As in the following example, a configuration may be adopted in which an error notification is performed while the VL signal is off.

FIG. 86A shows whether the operation (loading) of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation (loading / lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. There is. Below that, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Below that, the state of the VL signal is shown.

As shown in FIG. 86A, when the VL signal is on, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as effective operations. In addition, the error notification described later is not performed.

When the VL signal is turned off, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In addition, the effect image display device 157 displays an error notification display. On the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 86 (a), a character display such as "communication with the lending machine has not been established" is displayed. As the error notification, it may be notified that the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are invalid. For example, a character display such as "Bet operation / lever operation is invalid" or a character display such as "Bet operation / lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine has not been established" may be displayed.

Subsequently, a modified example of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, regardless of the value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal is turned off, the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. , In the modified example described below, the correspondence differs depending on the value of "the number of game medals". That is, in the first modification, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are in a state where the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value (in this example, 15000, which is the second threshold value for payout) (15000). As shown in FIG. 86 (a), when the VL signal is turned off in (for example, 980 sheets), it is treated as an invalid operation. The fact that the "number of game medals" is small means that the player may end the game at any time, so the player is made aware early that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established, and the clerk makes an early notice. Prompt repair. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off while the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than the above-mentioned threshold value, it is treated as an effective operation.

FIG. 86 (b) shows a first modification in the case where the “number of game medals” is 15550, which is 15,000 or more, which is the second threshold for payout.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the insertion operation of the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132) is invalidated, and there is no opportunity to operate the start lever 135 or the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the first modification shown in FIG. 86 (b), when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second threshold for payout, the "number of game medals" eventually reaches the threshold for payout, and the next game may be performed. Until that happens, we will not stop the progress of the game so that the players can enjoy it. Further, the fact that the game is continued even if the "number of game medals" exceeds the second threshold for payout is often in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and the game is played in this state. There is a high possibility that the interest of the game will be significantly reduced, and it is not preferable to stop the game. Therefore, the progress of the game is intentionally not stopped.

In the first modification in FIG. 86B, the progress of the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off, but even in this modification, when the VL signal is turned off, an error notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Is displayed.

FIG. 87 shows a second modified example in which the operation differs depending on whether or not the “number of game medals” is less than a certain threshold value.

The state shown in FIG. 87 (a) is a state in which the number of game medals is less than a certain threshold value (also in this example, 15,000, which is the second threshold value for payout) of 14,000 medals. In the second modification, even if the VL signal is turned off in this state, all the operations of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as effective operations. Therefore, both the operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are effective. However, even in the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off, the error notification display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The state shown in FIG. 87 (b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15550, which is equal to or higher than a certain threshold value (second threshold value for payout). In the second modification, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the plurality of types of game progress operations are invalidated. That is, the operations of the bet buttons 130 and 132 and the operations of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of one game are invalidated. In addition, an error notification display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The second modification shown in FIG. 87 is the exact opposite of the first modification, but the fact that the "number of game medals" is small may be immediately after the start of the game, and does not hinder the progress of the game that has just started. There is an aim such as. Further, in the slot machine 100, it cannot be said that there is a possibility that the "game medal number" will disappear no matter what kind of trouble occurs, so the "game medal number" is large. If the "number of game medals" disappears in this state, the disadvantage will increase. Therefore, when the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold value (second threshold value for payout), the progress of the game is stopped and the clerk prompts the early repair. In addition, the fact that the number of "game medals" is large means that the player can perform the counting operation at any time, so the player is made aware early that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established. , The aim is to encourage early repair by the clerk.

From the above explanation, the method of dealing with the case where the VL signal is turned off also changes depending on the value of the "number of game medals" and whether the player is in an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. The advantageous state for the player referred to here is a state in which the "number of game medals" can be easily increased by paying out (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), which is a disadvantageous state. Is a state in which the "number of game medals" tends to decrease as the game is continued (for example, a normal state).

When the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous state for the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), among a plurality of types of game progress operations. At least some operations are disabled. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), there are a plurality of types of game progress. All operations are treated as valid operations.

Alternatively, when the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous state for the player, even if the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), there are a plurality of types of game progress. All operations may be treated as valid operations. On the other hand, when the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, when the VL signal is turned off, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), a plurality of types of game progress operations are performed. At least some of our operations may be disabled.

If the value of the "number of game medals" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold value in a disadvantageous state for the player, the player may end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, at least one of a plurality of types of game progress operations is used to make the player notice early that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established and to encourage the clerk to repair it at an early stage. The operation of the part is invalidated. On the other hand, if the value of the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, there is a possibility that the advantageous state has just been reached. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all the operations of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as effective operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game.

Alternatively, if the value of the "game medal number" is equal to or higher than a certain threshold value in a state disadvantageous to the player, counting may not be necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all the operations of the plurality of types of game progress operations may be treated as effective operations so as not to interfere with the progress of the game. On the other hand, when the value of the "game medal number" is less than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, the player is made to notice early before the "game medal number" becomes equal to or more than the above threshold value, and the clerk When the VL signal is turned off, at least a part of the plurality of types of game progress operations may be invalidated in order to promote early repair by the player.

FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing another example when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off.

In the above description, even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and the error release operation for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) is not requested. However, in the example shown in FIG. 88A, it is treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and an error canceling operation for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) is also requested. As explained earlier, it is highly possible that the VL signal is turned off because the power of the rental machine 700 is not turned on or the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the rental machine 700 is disconnected. Therefore, even if the error canceling operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, there is a high possibility that an error will occur again. However, by making an error, a clerk can be called, and the clerk can turn on the power of the rental machine 700.

The example shown in FIG. 88B is an example in which the game can proceed until the counting button 171 is operated even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 88 (b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all the operations of the plurality of types of game progress operations are treated as effective operations. When the VL signal is turned off, it means that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, and the lending machine 700 can also determine that there is an abnormality and notify the error. If the error notification is performed on the rental machine 700 side immediately after the VL signal is turned off, the clerk can be called without immediately performing the notification on the slot machine 100 side. Further, since the communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, the counting notification may not be transmitted to the lending machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 is notified at the timing when the counting button 171 is operated. By doing so, the slot machine 100 side can perform the notification with the minimum opportunity, and the player can comfortably proceed with the game by suppressing the excessive notification.

After detecting the operation of the counting button 171, the notification on the slot machine 100 side continues until the VL signal returns to ON.

<others>
In the present embodiment, a slot machine 100 using a medal (coin) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball (for example, a pachinko ball) is used for playing a game. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

The slot machine is a slot machine that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game machine) or a personal computer by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to a medal, and the game medium is input from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). The payout of the game medium includes outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , Such modifications and alterations are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most preferable actions and effects arising from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

<< Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment >>
Hereinafter, the configurations of the invention described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation on the input operation means.
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the input operation means (for example, FIG. 15). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the input request number of the game value based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the input request number (the game value update process). For example, step S4607) in FIG. 43,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 of FIG. 43).
The game control means is based on the operation when the operation to the input operation means is performed between the time when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means and the time when the response information is received. It is a means that does not transmit the input operation information to the game value number control means (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 15 waits until a response command is received, and [operation of the game control unit 302 by the input operation (input). Command transmission, etc.)]),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The loading operation means includes a first charging operating means (for example, one bet button 130) and a second charging operating means different from the first charging operating means (for example, MAX betting button 132).
The game control means
Based on the operation to the first throwing operation means, the first throwing operation information (for example, a throwing command in which the number of demanded throws is one) is used as the throwing operation information in the game value number control means. Send to
Based on the operation to the second charging operation means, the second charging operation information (for example, the number of sheets requested to be loaded is three) that is different from the first charging operation information as the charging operation information. It is a means for transmitting an input command) to the game value number control means.
The game value number control means
Based on the reception of the first insertion operation information, the first game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals for one input request number) is performed as the game value update process.
Based on the reception of the second insertion operation information, the second game value update process (for example, the number of game medals for three input request sheets) different from the first game value update process is used as the game value update process. It is a means to perform subtraction),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, the current bet number becomes the maximum bet number). If, the number of game medals is 0),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game control means is a means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 17).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) is provided.
The game control means
Based on the fact that the response information is received between the time when the input operation information is transmitted and the time when the predetermined period elapses, the predetermined game information is output to the effect control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 15). ),
It is a means for outputting the predetermined game information to the effect control means even when the response information is not received between the transmission of the input operation information and the elapse of the predetermined period (for example). , In FIG. 15, if the response command is not received, the response command is considered abnormal, and step S1114 is executed).
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information ([Operation of game control unit 302 by input operation (transmission of input command, etc.)]. reference),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation on the input operation means.
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the input operation means (for example, FIG. 15). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the input request number of the game value based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the input request number (the game value update process). For example, step S4607) in FIG. 43,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 of FIG. 43).
The game control means is based on the operation when the operation to the input operation means is performed between the time when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means and the time when the response information is received. It is a means that does not transmit the input operation information to the game value number control means (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 15 waits until a response command is received, and [operation of the game control unit 302 by the input operation (input). Command transmission, etc.)]),
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation on the input operation means.
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the input operation means (for example, FIG. 15). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the input request number of the game value based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the input request number (the game value update process). For example, step S4607) in FIG. 43,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 of FIG. 43).
The game control means is based on the operation when the operation to the input operation means is performed between the time when the input operation information is transmitted to the game value number control means and the time when the response information is received. It is a means that does not transmit the input operation information to the game value number control means (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 15 waits until a response command is received, and [operation of the game control unit 302 by the input operation (input). Command transmission, etc.)]),
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation on the input operation means.
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the input operation means (for example, FIG. 15). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the input request number of the game value based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the input request number (the game value update process). For example, step S4607) in FIG. 43,
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, a game value update process) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. , Steps S3513, S3514) of FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
When the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than re-request) is transmitted to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed.
It is a means for transmitting the second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([[When input command is received]. Operation],
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means is a means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device.
The game value number control means
In the counting process, the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device is stored in the transmission buffer, and the game value update process is performed (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32).
When the input operation information is received while the game value number is stored in the transmission buffer and the game value update process is being performed in the counting process, the second response information is used in the game control means. A means of sending,
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means stores a part of the game value number stored in the game value number storage means in the transmission buffer in one counting process, and from the game value number. This is a means for subtracting a part of the game value number (for example, since the maximum value of the number of counts at one time is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 38), it may be a part of the number of game medals). ,
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the game value number control means receives the input operation information between the end of one counting process and the start of the next counting process, the first response information Is a means for transmitting to the game control means (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than the re-request).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the second response information is received, the game control means is a means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means (for example,). No determination in step S1310 of FIG. 17),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game control means does not perform the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit (for example, determination of No in step S1306 of FIG. 17), and the operation to the charging operation means is performed. This is a means for invalidating this (for example, step S1113 in FIG. 15 is not executed because the response result becomes abnormal).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, the current bet number becomes the maximum bet number). If, the number of game medals is 0),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game control means is a means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the first response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 17).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation on the input operation means.
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the input operation means (for example, FIG. 15). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the input request number of the game value based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the input request number (the game value update process). For example, step S4607) in FIG. 43,
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) Is a viable means,
The game value number control means
When the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than re-request) is transmitted to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed.
It is a means for transmitting the second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([[When input command is received]. Operation],
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation on the input operation means.
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the input operation means (for example, FIG. 15). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the input request number of the game value based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the input request number (the game value update process). For example, step S4607) in FIG. 43,
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. Is a viable means of
The game value number control means
When the input operation information is received, the first response information (for example, other than re-request) is transmitted to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not performed.
It is a means for transmitting the second response information (for example, re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is performed when the input operation information is received ([[When input command is received]. Operation],
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation on the input operation means.
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the input operation means (for example, FIG. 15). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the input request number of the game value based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the input request number (the game value update process). For example, step S4607) in FIG. 43,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 of FIG. 43).
The game value number control means
When the input request number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, it is stored in the game value number storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the input request number from the game value number is executed, and the response information including the information indicating that the input request number is subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. A modified example of 53 to 55, a determination of Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 55, the same value as the number of required insertions is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command).
When the input request number derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, it is stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the game value number and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained to the game control means (for example, a modification of FIGS. 53 to 55). , No determination in steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG. 55, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount by the response command).
The game control means
When the response information including the information indicating that the input request number has been subtracted is received, the input process for inputting the game value of the input request number is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 53).
When the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received, it is a means that does not perform the input process (for example, 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 53, so that the input request is made. The number of sheets is not input),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
As the input operation means, there is a maximum number of input operation means (for example, MAX bet button 132).
The game control means receives the maximum number insertion operation information (for example, an insertion command in which the maximum bet number is the requested number), which is the insertion operation information, based on the operation to the maximum number insertion operation means. It is a means that can be transmitted to the game value number control means, and is
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of input requests based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information ([Modification with respect to the input operation]. Example]),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information on the input number limited flag-on).
The number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the input operation information includes the predetermined information. In the case, the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example). , A modification of FIGS. 53 to 55, determination of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG. 55, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount by the response command).
The input request number derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and the input operation information does not include the predetermined information. In the case, the game value update process for setting the game value number stored in the game value number storage means to 0 is executed, and the response information including information indicating the game value number before becoming 0 is executed. Is a means that may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, a modified example of FIGS. 53 to 55, a determination of No in step S4604 of FIG. 55, a determination of Yes in S4621, and the number of game medals are all subtracted. (Becomes 0), the number of game medals before subtraction is returned by the response command as the subtraction amount),
The game control means
When the response information including the information indicating the game value number before becoming 0 is received, it is a means for inputting the game value of the game value number (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 53). ,
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
As the loading operation means, there is a minimum number loading operation means (for example, one bet button 130).
Based on the operation to the minimum number input operation means, the game control means uses the minimum number input operation information (for example, an input command with a requested number of 1), which is the input operation information, as the game value. It is a means that can be transmitted to the number control means,
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the minimum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of input requests based on the reception of the minimum number input operation information.
The minimum number input operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 in FIG. 53).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game control means is a means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 17).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation on the input operation means.
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the input operation means (for example, FIG. 15). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the input request number of the game value based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the input request number (the game value update process). For example, step S4607) in FIG. 43,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 of FIG. 43).
The game value number control means
When the input request number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, it is stored in the game value number storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the input request number from the game value number is executed, and the response information including the information indicating that the input request number is subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. A modified example of 53 to 55, a determination of Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 55, the same value as the number of required insertions is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command).
When the input request number derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, it is stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the game value number and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained to the game control means (for example, a modification of FIGS. 53 to 55). , No determination in steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG. 55, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount by the response command).
The game control means
When the response information including the information indicating that the input request number has been subtracted is received, the input process for inputting the game value of the input request number is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 53).
When the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received, it is a means that does not perform the input process (for example, 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 53, so that the input request is made. The number of sheets is not input),
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
Insertion operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 and 132) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game based on the operation on the input operation means.
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (for example, input command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the input operation means (for example, FIG. 15). Steps S1110, S1111),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the input request number of the game value based on the reception of the input operation information and performing the game value update process based on the input request number (the game value update process). For example, step S4607) in FIG. 43,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 of FIG. 43).
The game value number control means
When the input request number derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, it is stored in the game value number storage means. The game value update process of subtracting the input request number from the game value number is executed, and the response information including the information indicating that the input request number is subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, FIG. A modified example of 53 to 55, a determination of Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 55, the same value as the number of required insertions is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtraction is returned by the response command).
When the input request number derived based on the received input operation information is larger than the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, it is stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the game value number and transmitting the response information including information indicating that the game value number is maintained to the game control means (for example, a modification of FIGS. 53 to 55). , No determination in steps S4604 and S4621 of FIG. 55, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount by the response command).
The game control means
When the response information including the information indicating that the input request number has been subtracted is received, the input process for inputting the game value of the input request number is performed (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 53).
When the response information including the information indicating that the game value number is maintained is received, it is a means that does not perform the input process (for example, 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 53, so that the input request is made. The number of sheets is not input),
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
Settlement operation means (for example, checkout button 134) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the settlement operation means (for example, FIG. 16). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example). Step S4704 in FIG. 44),
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, a game value update process) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. , Steps S3513, S3514) of FIG. 32).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is said to be the second counting process when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the settlement operation information is received during the execution of one counting process, the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information may be the target of the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 30), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is the target of the next and subsequent counting processes. Become),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed in accordance with the communication cycle.
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, the game value number control means derives the settlement number based on the reception of the settlement operation information and stores the game value number. It is a means that may be the target of the second counting process by summing up the game value numbers stored in the means.
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0). ,
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 44).
The game control means is a means for updating the communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 in FIG. 17).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
Settlement operation means (for example, checkout button 134) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the settlement operation means (for example, FIG. 16). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example). Step S4704 in FIG. 44),
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) Is a viable means,
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device.
The game value number control means is said to be the second counting process when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the settlement operation information is received during the execution of one counting process, the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information may be the target of the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 30), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is the target of the next and subsequent counting processes. Become),
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
Settlement operation means (for example, checkout button 134) and
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (for example, a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on the operation to the settlement operation means (for example, FIG. 16). Step S1204, Step S1205),
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example). Step S4704 in FIG. 44),
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. Is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is said to be the second counting process when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the settlement operation information is received during the execution of one counting process, the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information may be the target of the second counting process. (For example, the number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 30), and the number of game medals added by the settlement command during the counting process is the target of the next and subsequent counting processes. Become),
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the payout in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 20). ,
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, FIG. 47, step S4B04 in FIG. 48),
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, a game value update process) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. , Steps S3513, S3514) of FIG. 32).
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is said to be the second counting process when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during the execution of one counting process, the number of payouts derived based on the reception of the payout information may be the target of the second counting process (for example,). , The number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 30), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is subject to the counting process from the next time onward). ,
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The first counting process and the second counting process are continuously executed in accordance with the communication cycle.
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, the game value number control means uses the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the game value number storage means. It is a means that may be the target of the second counting process by summing up the stored game value numbers.
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) for controlling the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) is provided.
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 in FIG. 48).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the response information indicating that the game value update process based on the reception of the payout information has been normally completed ( For example, step S1607) in FIG.
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see [Operation of game control unit 302 by payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the payout in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 20). ,
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, FIG. 47, step S4B04 in FIG. 48),
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. ) Is a viable means,
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game medium management device.
The game value number control means is said to be the second counting process when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during the execution of one counting process, the number of payouts derived based on the reception of the payout information may be the target of the second counting process (for example,). , The number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 30), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is subject to the counting process from the next time onward). ,
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the payout in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 20). ,
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, FIG. 47, step S4B04 in FIG. 48),
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. Is a viable means of
The counting process may be executed in accordance with the communication cycle (for example, 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is said to be the second counting process when the second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the communication cycle from the next time onward after the first counting process, which is the counting process, is executed. When the payout information is received during the execution of one counting process, the number of payouts derived based on the reception of the payout information may be the target of the second counting process (for example,). , The number of game medals to be counted is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 30), and the number of game medals added by the payout command during the counting process is subject to the counting process from the next time onward). ,
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means derives the loan number of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the upper server), and updates the game value based on the loan number. It is a means capable of performing the processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 36 and step S3714 in FIG. 34).
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means stores the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the player (for example, a determination of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 37).
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value, the game value number control means stores the game value stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, see No determination in step S4107 of FIG. 37, [Lending notification (regular transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game is provided.
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the payout in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 20). ,
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, FIG. 47, step S4B04 in FIG. 48),
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the second value, the game value number control means stores the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the number of payouts to (for example, determination of Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 48).
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the second value, the game value number control means stores the game value stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, determination of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 48).
The second value is a value larger than the first value (for example, step S4B03 in FIG. 48, step S4107 in FIG. 37).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the loan information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 33).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means is a means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device.
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means stores the response information in the transmission buffer and stores the response information in the transmission buffer. After the transmission buffer is cleared with the transmission to the external processing device, the game value update process of adding the loaned number to the game value stored in the game value number storage means can be executed. (For example, determination of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 34).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means updates the communication number with the external processing device (for example,). , A determination of Yes in step S3703 of FIG. 34, step S3706), a means for transmitting the response information including the first information (for example, the loan serial number received this time) to the external processing device.
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value, the game value number control means does not update the communication number with the external processing device ( For example, it is a means for transmitting the response information including the determination of No in step S3703 of FIG. 34, step S3706 is not executed), and the second information (for example, the loan serial number received last time) to the external processing device ([[[]. Lending receipt result response (regular transmission from medal number control unit 350 to lending machine 700)],
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device.
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device immediately before the latest communication number.
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34).
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means stores the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the player (for example, a determination of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 37).
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value, the game value number control means stores the game value stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, see No determination in step S4107 of FIG. 37, [Lending notification (regular transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]).
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34),
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, the game value number control means stores the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the number of loans to the player (for example, a determination of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 37).
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value, the game value number control means stores the game value stored in the game value number storage means. It is a means for maintaining the number (for example, see No determination in step S4107 of FIG. 37, [Lending notification (regular transmission from the lending machine 700 to the medal number control unit 350)]).
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means derives the loan number of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device (for example, the lending machine 700, the upper server), and updates the game value based on the loan number. It is a means capable of performing the processing (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 36 and step S3714 in FIG. 34).
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the loan information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 33).
The game value number control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device.
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared by transmitting the response information to the external processing device, the game It is a means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 34).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means includes a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32) including a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. Is a viable means of
The game value number control means is a means having a second transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device.
The game value number control means is a means for storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, FIG. 32). Steps S3513, S3514),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value (for example, a determination of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 37), the game value number control means performs the external process. While updating the communication number with the device (for example, determination of Yes in step S3703 in FIG. 34, step S3706), the response information including the first information (for example, the loan serial number received this time) is sent to the external processing device. It is a means capable of executing the game value update process of transmitting and adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, step S3714 of FIG. 34).
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the predetermined value (for example, determination of No in step S4107 of FIG. 37), the game value number control means is said to be external. Without updating the communication number with the processing device (for example, determination of No in step S3703 of FIG. 34, step S3706 is not executed), the response information including the second information (for example, the loan serial number received last time) is input. It is a means for transmitting to the external processing device and maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, determination of No in step S3712 in FIG. 34, S3714 is not executed).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device.
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device immediately before the latest communication number.
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34).
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game medium management device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the loan information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 33).
The game value number control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the game medium management device.
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the response information is transmitted to the game medium management device and the first transmission buffer is cleared, the first transmission buffer is cleared. It is a means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 34).
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the reception of the loan information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 33).
The game value number control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device.
The game value number control means stores the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared by transmitting the response information to the external processing device, the game It is a means for executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the value number storage means (for example, determination of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 34).
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. Is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 38). ) Can be transmitted to the external processing device.
When the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 38).
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 38), which is larger than the first value as the game value number, is repeated in the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). Sent,
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the first value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. An effect means (for example, an effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 61).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the game value number control means is in the predetermined operating state from the time when the power is cut off when the counting promotion state is set and then the power is restored, the counting is performed. It is a means by which the promotion state can be set (for example, FIG. 66 (b)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means is a means that does not transmit the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is resolved after setting the counting promotion state (for example,. Judgment of No in step S4211 of FIG. 38, clearing of the planned number of counts),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. Is a viable means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 38). ) Can be transmitted to the game medium management device.
When the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 38).
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 38), which is larger than the first value as the game value number, is applied to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). Sent repeatedly,
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. It is a viable means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 38). ) Can be transmitted to the external processing device.
When the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 38).
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 38), which is larger than the first value as the game value number, is repeated in the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). Sent,
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. Is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 56). ) Can be transmitted to the external processing device.
When the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 56).
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 56), which is larger than the first value as the game value number, is repeated in the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). Sent,
The second value may increase depending on the length of duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 65).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The degree of increase of the second value may increase depending on the length of the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 65).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the game value number control means is in the predetermined operating state from the time when the power is cut off when the counting promotion state is set and then the power is restored, the counting is performed. It is a means capable of setting the promotion state and maximizing the degree of increase (FIG. 66 (b)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the first value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. An effect means (for example, an effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 61).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the game value number stored by the game value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, the game value number control means stores the game value number stored by the game value number storage means. Is a means for reducing the degree of increase of the second value as compared with the case where the value exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 66 (a)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. Is a viable means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 56). ) Can be transmitted to the game medium management device.
When the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 56).
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 56), which is larger than the first value as the game value number, is applied to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). Sent repeatedly,
The second value may increase depending on the length of duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 65).
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. It is a viable means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 56). ) Can be transmitted to the external processing device.
When the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 56).
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 10, step S4222 in FIG. 56), which is larger than the first value as the game value number, is repeated in the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). Sent,
The second value may increase depending on the length of duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 65).
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. Is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value (for example, the game value number) is used. For example, 1. Step S4212) of FIG. 57 can be transmitted to the external processing device.
When the first time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the game value number is a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, the step of FIG. 57). S4209) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
It is a means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (for example, 2 seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state (for example,). Step S4234 in FIG. 57),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 of FIG. 57, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 67).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
A notification means (for example, effect image display device 157, speaker 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined notification when the automatic counting state is set is provided (FIGS. 69 and 70).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the first value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. An effect means (for example, an effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 61).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means is said to be automatic when a power failure occurs when the automatic counting state is set and then the operating means is in the predetermined operating state when the power is restored. It is a means that can set the counting state (for example, FIG. 68 (b)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means is a means that does not set the automatic counting state when the game value number stored by the game value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (FIG. 68 (a)). ,
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. Is a viable means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value (for example, the game value number) is used. For example, step S4212) of FIG. 57 can be transmitted to the game medium management device.
When the first time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the game value number is a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, the step of FIG. 57). S4209) can be transmitted to the game medium management device,
It is a means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (for example, 2 seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state (for example,). Step S4234 in FIG. 57),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 of FIG. 57, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 67).
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. It is a viable means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the first time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value (for example, the game value number) is used. For example, 1. Step S4212) of FIG. 57 can be transmitted to the external processing device.
When the first time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the game value number is a second value larger than the first value (for example, 50, the step of FIG. 57). S4209) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
It is a means capable of setting an automatic counting state when a second time (for example, 2 seconds) longer than the first time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state (for example,). Step S4234 in FIG. 57),
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved, the second value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). (For example, determination of Yes in step S4235 of FIG. 57, step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 67).
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. Is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32).
If the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the game value number controlling means regards the predetermined operating state as an effective operating state. It is a means capable of executing the update process (for example, FIG. 71 (a)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number (for example, 1, step 1, FIG. 38). S4212) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
When the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 38).
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 38), which is larger than the first value as the game value number, is repeated in the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). Sent,
When the operating means is in the predetermined operating state from the time when the power is restored after the power interruption occurs, the game value number control means is in the predetermined operating state before the power interruption. Regardless of the time, it is a means for determining the number of game values to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time in which the predetermined operating state is obtained after the power is restored (FIG. 71 (a)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number (for example, 1, step 1, FIG. 38). S4212) can be transmitted to the external processing device,
When the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 38).
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 38), which is larger than the first value as the game value number, is repeated in the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms). Sent,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state when the operation means is in the predetermined operation state from the time when the power is cut off and then the power is restored (FIG. FIG. 71 (a)),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the first value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. An effect means (for example, an effect image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 61).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. Is a viable means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
If the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the game value number controlling means regards the predetermined operating state as an effective operating state. It is a means capable of executing the update process (for example, FIG. 71 (a)).
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
Operating means (for example, counting button 171) and
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. It is a viable means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
If the operating means is in a predetermined operating state when a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the game value number controlling means regards the predetermined operating state as an effective operating state. It is a means capable of executing the update process (for example, FIG. 71 (a)).
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
A display means (for example, a game medal number display device 170, an effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and
It is a game table equipped with
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, the display means displays a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from the value before the update to the value after the update. It is a possible means (eg, FIGS. 74-78).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value number control means performs a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32) including a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number. It ’s a viable means,
The counting process is a process executed according to a predetermined cycle (for example, 300 ms).
The display means is a means for displaying the change in a time shorter than the predetermined cycle (FIGS. 74 and 75).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
Equipped with an operating means (for example, counting button 171)
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation on the operating means.
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 38). ) Can be transmitted to the external processing device.
When the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the counting promotion state can be set (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 38).
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value (for example, 50, step S4209 in FIG. 38), which is larger than the first value as the game value number, is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined cycle.
The game value number control means is a means that does not transmit the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is resolved after setting the counting promotion state (for example,. Judgment of No in step S4211 of FIG. 38, clearing of the planned number of counts),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
A display means (for example, a game medal number display device 170, an effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and
It is a game table equipped with
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, the display means displays a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from the value before the update to the value after the update. It is a possible means (eg, FIGS. 74-78).
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
A display means (for example, a game medal number display device 170, an effect image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and
It is a game table equipped with
When the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated, the display means displays a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from the value before the update to the value after the update. It is a possible means (eg, FIGS. 74-78).
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game.
A game value information having a game value information storage means (for example, RAM358) for storing game value information related to a game value used for a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal (for example, FIG. 13). Step S101),
The game value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 26),
The game control means is a means that does not clear the game information storage means when it is determined in the game value information control means that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if the error of the medal number control unit 350 is received).
When it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal in the game control means, the game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means. (For example, determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 26).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the abnormality of the game value information control means (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the game control means in a predetermined cycle (for example, one command is transmitted in eight interrupts (0.745 ms × 8)).
The game control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 22, [Operation for error (game control). Part 302)]),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means becomes abnormal in the game information stored in the game information storage means. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, determination of No in step S3007 of FIG. 26 and step S4407 of FIG. 40, initialization of chip information).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game.
A game value information having a game value information storage means (for example, RAM358) for storing game value information related to a game value used for a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal (for example, FIG. 13). Step S101),
The game value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 26),
The game control means is a means that does not clear the game information storage means when it is determined in the game value information control means that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if the error of the medal number control unit 350 is received).
When it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal in the game control means, the game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means. (For example, determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 26).
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game.
A game value information having a game value information storage means (for example, RAM358) for storing game value information related to a game value used for a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) and
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal (for example, FIG. 13). Step S101),
The game value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game value information storage means when it is determined that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. (For example, step S3005 in FIG. 26),
The game control means is a means that does not clear the game information storage means when it is determined in the game value information control means that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal. Yes (for example, the game control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even if the error of the medal number control unit 350 is received).
When it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is abnormal in the game control means, the game value information control means clears at least a part of the game value information storage means. (For example, determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 26).
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game.
A game value information having a game value information storage means (for example, RAM358) for storing game value information related to a game value used for a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) and
It is a game table equipped with
When it is determined in the game value information control means that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means has an abnormality, the game control means may execute a process for the abnormality. Means (see [Operation for error (Game control unit 302)]),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the abnormality of the game value information control means (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 22).
The abnormality of the game control means is notified with priority over the communication abnormality (see [Operation for error (game control unit 302)]).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
When the game value information control means determines that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means is abnormal, the game value information control means becomes abnormal in the game information stored in the game information storage means. Corresponding processing may be executed (for example, determination of No in step S3007 of FIG. 26 and step S4407 of FIG. 40, initialization of chip information).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game.
A game value information having a game value information storage means (for example, RAM358) for storing game value information related to a game value used for a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) and
It is a game table equipped with
When it is determined in the game value information control means that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means has an abnormality, the game control means may execute a process for the abnormality. Means (see [Operation for error (Game control unit 302)]),
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that has a game information storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores game information related to a game state and controls the progress of the game.
A game value information having a game value information storage means (for example, RAM358) for storing game value information related to a game value used for a game, and updating the game value information stored in the game value information storage means. Control means (for example, medal number control unit 350) and
It is a game table equipped with
When it is determined in the game value information control means that the game value information stored in the game value information storage means has an abnormality, the game control means may execute a process for the abnormality. Means (see [Operation for error (Game control unit 302)]),
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs bidirectional communication with the game control means and performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) in one-way communication with the game control means. )When,
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the payout in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 20). ,
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, FIG. 47, step S4B04 in FIG. 48),
When the game value number control means receives the payout information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value, the game value number control means provides predetermined information in the game control means. (For example, in step S4B03 of FIG. 48, the determination of No and the response command are set to "abnormal").
Based on the reception of the predetermined information, the game control means outputs the predetermined game information to the effect control means (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 20).
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. 79, [Operation of the game control unit 302 by payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.) )〕reference),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The game control means is a means capable of making the game unable to proceed when the predetermined information is received (for example, in step S1606 of FIG. 20, No is determined and the process is repeated. [Game control by payout] Operation of unit 302 (sending of payout command, etc.)]),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
A counting operation means (for example, a counting button 171) is provided.
Based on the operation to the counting operation means, the game value number control means transmits the game value number to an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and the game value. It is a means capable of executing the game value update process of subtracting a number (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 32).
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background.
The predetermined effect is an effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means.
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 79 (b)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs bidirectional communication with the game control means and performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) in one-way communication with the game control means. )When,
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the payout in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 20). ,
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, FIG. 47, step S4B04 in FIG. 48),
When the game value number control means receives the payout information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value, the game value number control means provides predetermined information in the game control means. (For example, in step S4B03 of FIG. 48, the determination of No and the response command are set to "abnormal").
Based on the reception of the predetermined information, the game control means outputs the predetermined game information to the effect control means (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 20).
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. 79, [Operation of the game control unit 302 by payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.) )〕reference),
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs bidirectional communication with the game control means and performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) in one-way communication with the game control means. )When,
It is a game table equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (for example, a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the payout in the game (for example, steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 20). ,
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, FIG. 47, step S4B04 in FIG. 48),
When the game value number control means receives the payout information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value, the game value number control means provides predetermined information in the game control means. (For example, in step S4B03 of FIG. 48, the determination of No and the response command are set to "abnormal").
Based on the reception of the predetermined information, the game control means outputs the predetermined game information to the effect control means (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 20).
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, FIG. 79, [Operation of the game control unit 302 by payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.) )〕reference),
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a game value number control means) that performs bidirectional communication with an external processing device (for example, a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. , Medal number control unit 350),
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) in one-way communication with the game control means. )When,
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34),
When the game value number control means receives the loan information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value, the game value number control means receives the predetermined information in the game control means. Is a means of sending
The game control means outputs the predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information.
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 79, the “number of game medals” sets the lending threshold value by lending. If it exceeds the limit, a lending error will occur),
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The effect control means is a means capable of causing the effect means to perform a demo effect when the game is not executed.
The predetermined effect is an effect that is also performed when the demo effect is performed (for example, FIG. 82 (a)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
A counting operation means (for example, a counting button 171) is provided.
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the counting operation means. Is a viable means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background.
The predetermined effect is an effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means.
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 79 (b)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
With a game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs bidirectional communication with the game medium management device and performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means. ,
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) in one-way communication with the game control means. )When,
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the game medium management device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34).
When the game value number control means receives the loan information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value, the game value number control means receives the predetermined information in the game control means. Is a means of sending
The game control means outputs the predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information.
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 79, the “number of game medals” sets the lending threshold value by lending. If it exceeds the limit, a lending error will occur),
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
A game control means (for example, a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of the game,
A game value number storage means (for example, RAM 358) that stores a game value number related to a game value used for a game, and
A game value number control means (for example, a medal number control unit 350) that performs bidirectional communication with the external processing device and performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means.
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) in one-way communication with the game control means. )When,
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on the reception of the loan information from the external processing device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34),
When the game value number control means receives the loan information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value, the game value number control means receives the predetermined information in the game control means. Is a means of sending
The game control means outputs the predetermined game information to the effect control means based on the reception of the predetermined information.
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform a predetermined effect based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 79, the “number of game medals” sets the lending threshold value by lending. If it exceeds the limit, a lending error will occur),
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

Also, in the above description,
A game console provided with a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with an external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) to advance a game.
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used for the game (for example, updating the number of game medals).
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on receiving the loan information from the external processing device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device.
The main control means is a means capable of making the game unable to proceed when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 14).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) in one-way communication with the main control means. )
The effect control means is a means that does not notify the effect means that the communication abnormality occurs when the communication abnormality is determined (for example, does not execute error notification for the VL signal abnormality).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

In addition, it is the game table described above.
The effect control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect performed by the effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157, the speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420) in one-way communication with the main control means. )
A counting operation means (for example, a counting button 171) is provided.
The main control means executes a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the counting operation means. It is a possible means (eg, steps S3513, S3514 of FIG. 32).
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to display a background.
The effect control means is a means for causing the effect means to perform an effect of blinking a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means.
The display prompting the operation of the counting operation means is a display displayed in front of the background display (for example, FIG. 79 (b)).
A game table, which is characterized in that, is described.

again,
A game medium management device (for example, a rental machine 700) connected to a game table (for example, a slot machine 100).
The game table
A game table provided with a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with the game medium management device to advance a game.
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used for the game (for example, updating the number of game medals).
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on receiving the loan information from the game medium management device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. (For example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34).
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game medium management device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the game medium management device.
The main control means is a means capable of making the game unable to proceed when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 14).
A game medium management device, characterized by the above, is described.

again,
With a game console (for example, slot machine 100),
An external processing device (for example, a rental machine 700, a higher-level server) connected to the game console,
A game system (for example, a game system S) including at least
The game table
A game console provided with a main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that performs bidirectional communication with the external processing device to advance a game.
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used for the game (for example, updating the number of game medals).
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the loan number of the game value based on receiving the loan information from the external processing device and performing the game value update process based on the loan number. Yes (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 36, step S3714 in FIG. 34),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the external processing device from the status of a predetermined signal (for example, a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device.
The main control means is a means capable of making the game unable to proceed when it is determined that the communication is abnormal (for example, determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 14).
A gaming system, characterized by the fact that it is described.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Display window 130, 132 Bet button 134 Settlement button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Directional image display device 171 Counting button 272,277 Speaker 420 Various lamps 302 Game control unit 350 Medal number control unit 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control unit 700 Lending machine 707 Lending button 800 Hall management terminal 810 Intermediate management terminal 820 Management server

Claims (7)

Operation means and
A game value number storage means for storing the game value number related to the game value used for the game,
A game value number control means that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and a game value number control means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means executes the game value update process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. It ’s a possible means,
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number can be transmitted to the external processing device.
It is a means capable of setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state.
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle.
The second value may increase depending on the length of duration of the predetermined operating state.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The degree of increase of the second value may increase depending on the length of the duration of the predetermined operating state.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 2.
When the game value number control means is in the predetermined operating state from the time when the power is cut off when the counting promotion state is set and then the power is restored, the counting is performed. It is a means that can set the promotion state and maximize the degree of increase.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
When the first value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, a predetermined effect is not performed, and when the second value as the game value number is transmitted to the external processing device, the predetermined effect is not performed. Equipped with a production means to perform a predetermined production,
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
When the game value number stored by the game value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, the game value number control means stores the game value number stored by the game value number storage means. Is a means for reducing the degree of increase of the second value as compared with the case where the value exceeds the predetermined value.
A game table characterized by that. A game medium management device connected to the game console,
The game table
Operation means and
A game value number storage means for storing the game value number related to the game value used for the game,
A game value number control means that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and a game value number control means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a process of transmitting the game value number to the game medium management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. Is a viable means of
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operation state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, the first value as the game value number can be transmitted to the game medium management device. ,
It is a means capable of setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state.
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the game medium management device at a predetermined cycle.
The second value may increase depending on the length of duration of the predetermined operating state.
A game medium management device characterized by this. Amusement table and
An external processing device connected to the game console and
A gaming system that includes at least
The game table
Operation means and
A game value number storage means for storing the game value number related to the game value used for the game,
A game value number control means that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and a game value number control means.
It is a game table equipped with
The game value number control means performs a game value update process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and subtracting the game value number based on the operation to the operating means. It ’s a viable means,
The game value number control means
If the predetermined operating state is resolved before the predetermined time elapses after the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, the first value as the game value number can be transmitted to the external processing device.
It is a means capable of setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time elapses while the operating means is in the predetermined operating state.
The counting promotion state is maintained when the operating means is in the predetermined operating state, and is released when the predetermined operating state of the operating means is resolved.
In the counting promotion state, a second value larger than the first value as the game value number is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle.
The second value may increase depending on the length of duration of the predetermined operating state.
A game system characterized by that.

Images